(internal_self_insert): Delete '#ifdef HAVE_FACES' and
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
83b6997f
GM
34* When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
35file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
36
d7b38c05 37** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 38added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
39Postscript files are included.
40
41** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
42`dired-ref.tex'.
43
25ad1371
GM
44** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
45expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
46
47This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
48determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
49mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
50interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
51regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
52associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
53
424d8b44 54+++
f0298744
DL
55** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
56displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
57menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
58menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
59
9a8d84ca
DL
60** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
61a version-dependent component.
62
d76c03ea
GM
63** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
64Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
65will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
66character is still bound as before.
67
3b4fa1b2
DL
68** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
69using that menu.
70
40e857ea 71** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 72suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 73
beb2eb00 74+++
c08398de
DL
75** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
76buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
77contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
78by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
79insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
80the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
81Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
82
db7a3ede 83+++
3d6cd763
GM
84** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
85coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
86escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
87such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
88recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 89always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 90read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
91(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
92RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 93
0b8a3a6d
DL
94** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
95environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
96
424d8b44 97+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
98** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
99point in a pop-up window.
100
6d35b49f 101+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
102** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
103displays all characters in that character set.
104
105** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
106coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
107
a4067978 108+++
5cb6a58e 109** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
110on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
111defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 112
424d8b44 113+++
a1b8d58b
GM
114** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
115
6e417ca5
DL
116** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
117been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
118
424d8b44 119+++
5898e075
DL
120** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
121`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
122indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
123indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
124
424d8b44 125+++
abfcc168
GM
126** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
127sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 128(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
129You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
130
424d8b44 131+++
cc181e95
GM
132** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
133on the display using several methods
134
424d8b44 135+++
cc181e95
GM
136- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
137a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
138be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
139
424d8b44 140+++
cc181e95
GM
141- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
142equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
143
da4496b6 144- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
145
146- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
147the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
148
424d8b44 149+++
3b4fa1b2 150** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 151an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 152command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 153does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 154
424d8b44 155+++
176256a1 156** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
157`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
158typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 159
dd0add8e
DL
160** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
161characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
162
bf3ba9ac 163+++
699238d9
GM
164** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
165compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
166this behavior.
167
168The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
169compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
170Emacs dump core.
171
424d8b44 172+++
699238d9 173** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 174
7233c5bd
GM
175*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
176whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
177is useful for debugging X problems.
178
179Example:
180
699238d9 181 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 182
100b3cbb
GM
183*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
184visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
185the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
186and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
187visual class names are
188
189 TrueColor
190 PseudoColor
191 DirectColor
192 StaticColor
193 GrayScale
194 StaticGray
195
196Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
197`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
198meaning.
199
200The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
201supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
202`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
203visual.
204
205Example:
206
699238d9 207 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
208
209*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
210specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
211default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
212resource values are `true' or `on'.
213
214Example:
215
699238d9 216 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 217
0d0c76b8
EZ
218** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
219more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
220now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
221
42088c12 222** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 223display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
224shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
225be customized.
c60ea02e 226
424d8b44 227+++
31047e0d
DL
228** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
229
424d8b44 230+++
b02786f9
GM
231** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
232all frames except the selected one.
233
3261c1d8
DL
234** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
235to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
236
ffe36136 237** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
238the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
239MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
240displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
241
0292b49f 242+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
243** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
244MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 245
559cee90
DL
246** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
247read mail from the menu etc.
248
480b5773 249+++
271b4185
GM
250** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
251a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
252
0daee095
GM
253** Changes in Texinfo mode.
254
255** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
256macros
257
258 Key binding Macro
259 -------------------------
260 C-c C-c C-s @strong
261 C-c C-c C-e @emph
262 C-c C-c u @url
263 C-c C-c q @quotation
264 C-c C-c m @email
265
559cee90
DL
266** Changes in Outline mode.
267
268There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
269`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
270the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
271
7a912f63
GM
272** Changes to Emacs Server
273
c0a8c108
EZ
274+++
275*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
276with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
277are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
278Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
279buffers to kill, as before.
280
281Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 282i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
283this way.
284
956777b3
GM
285** Changes to Show Paren mode.
286
287*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
288The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
289use. Default is 1000.
290
f6989277 291+++
404fa7d6
DL
292** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
293groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
294
424d8b44
DL
295+++
296** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
297M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
298M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
299buffers.
8964fec7 300
424d8b44 301+++
39783d73
WP
302** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
303under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
304.emacs file.
305
306The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
307determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
308
d35fce81
GM
309** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
310abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
311`directory-abbrev-alist'.
312
a933dad1
DL
313** Faces and frame parameters.
314
315There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
316Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
317`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
318`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
319sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
320for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
321parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
322
323Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
324`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 325`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
326`default' face and vice versa.
327
d80061fa 328+++
f77a4a8a
GM
329** New face `menu'.
330
331The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
332Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
333attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
334
424d8b44 335+++
a933dad1
DL
336** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
337
338The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
339colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
340correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
341the screen gamma of a frame's display.
342
343PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
344in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
345color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
346
347The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
348`ScreenGamma'.
349
350** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
351
352The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
353Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
354oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
355of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
356the text.
357
358** Emacs has a new face implementation.
359
360The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
361font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
362height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
363These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
364specify a font.
365
366Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
367These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
368under Lisp changes, below.
369
370** New default font is Courier 12pt.
371
424d8b44
DL
372+++
373** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
374of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
375otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
376
377** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
378truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
379foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
380customizing face `fringe'.
381
382** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
383can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
384
385** LessTif support.
386
424d8b44
DL
387Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
388You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
389
390** Toolkit scroll bars.
391
392Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
393LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
394configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
395bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
396bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
397Emacs.
398
399When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
400Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
401Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
402Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
403define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
404`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
405
406Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
407a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
408directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
409different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
410system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
411add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
412
413The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
414`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
415This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
416image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
417Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
418
419** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
420
421When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
422widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
423Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
424
424d8b44 425+++
a933dad1
DL
426** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
427
428When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
429whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
430defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
431highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
432displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
433whitespace.
434
6e612d4d 435+++
a933dad1
DL
436** Busy-cursor.
437
438Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
439display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
440
424d8b44 441+++
a933dad1
DL
442** Blinking cursor
443
444M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
445terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
446and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
447the group `cursor'.
448
449** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
450
451This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
452generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
453See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
454details.
455
456Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
457have to do anything to activate it.
458
459** Tabs and variable-width text.
460
461Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
462defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
463independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
464Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
465
466** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
467
424d8b44 468+++
a933dad1
DL
469*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
470
471 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
472
79dd1637
RS
473The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
474LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 475
79dd1637
RS
476*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
477LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 478
34d90e29 479+++
a933dad1
DL
480** Hscrolling in C code.
481
cc181e95
GM
482Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
483`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
484customized.
a933dad1
DL
485
486** Tool bar support.
487
488Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
489how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
490
424d8b44 491+++
a933dad1
DL
492** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
493
494Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
495mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
496line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
497about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
498in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
499
500Currently, the following actions have been defined:
501
502- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
503buffers.
504
505- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
506M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
507
508- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
509
424d8b44
DL
510- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
511`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
512
513- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
514
515** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
516
517When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 518from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
519non-nil.
520
521** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
522
523Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
524Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
525the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
526italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
527Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
528attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
529on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
530
531** Sound support
532
2f516940 533Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 534driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 535supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 536
424d8b44 537+++
a933dad1
DL
538** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
539the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
540forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
541value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
542users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
543even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
544
545The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
546
0e18b431 547+++
a933dad1
DL
548** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
549
550As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
551drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
552`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
553
fdd8bb68 554+++
a933dad1
DL
555** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
556bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
557
558This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
559`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
560variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
561
c5d00c64 562+++
a933dad1
DL
563** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
564
565When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
566value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
567number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 568fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
569
570When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
571value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
572number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 573fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
574
575** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
576notably at the end of lines.
577
578All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
579spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
580
424d8b44 581+++
eee54b0e
DL
582There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
583
a933dad1
DL
584** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
585query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
586after each match to get the replacement text.
587
00782214 588+++
d5483ab1
GM
589** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
590you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 591
424d8b44 592** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
593you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
594lisp-complete-symbol.
595
7af69644 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
598
163ea954
RS
599If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
600longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
601it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
602window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
603
604- User option: max-mini-window-height
605
606Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
607fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
608specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
609
610Default is 0.25.
611
2f72fd2f
GM
612** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
613
0d43b60d
GM
614** Changes to hideshow.el
615
616Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
617selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
618
619*** Generalized block selection and traversal
620
621A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
622(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
623which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
624`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
625point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
626(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
627
628If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
629i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
630backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
631the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
632
633*** Isearch support for updating mode line
634
635During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
636blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
637line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
638portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
639is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
640
641To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
642something like this in your .emacs.
643
644 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
645 (lambda ()
646 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
647
559cee90
DL
648** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
649
424d8b44 650+++
559cee90
DL
651If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
652entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
653log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
654
424d8b44 655+++
559cee90 656New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
657buffer.
658
659+++
660New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
661a log file.
eb2aac9d 662
502004be 663+++
eb2aac9d
GM
664Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
665if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
666
502004be 667+++
424d8b44
DL
668Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
669version number is performed based on regular expressions from
670`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
671Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 672
3476b54a
GM
673** Changes in Font Lock
674
675*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
676font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
677mode.
678
b3b98592
GM
679** Comint (subshell) changes
680
66b6c480
MB
681By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
682distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
683the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
684attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
685Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
686boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
687To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
688`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
689
b3b98592
GM
690Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
691and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
692
693The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
694buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
695buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
696
697The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
698M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
699the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
700
8c1bec7c
MB
701Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
702now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
703previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
704user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 705
e26cec67
GM
706** Changes to Rmail mode
707
c0510d27
GM
708*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
709set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
710receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
711recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
712`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
713as correspondent.
714
715Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
716mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 717regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 718
3b55acc9
GM
719*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
720to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
721Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
722with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
723for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
724
6a1950ec
GM
725*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
726like `j'.
727
5bb6f079
RS
728*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
729specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 730digest message.
e26cec67 731
993d8b7d
DL
732*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
733in which folder to put messages automatically.
734
400a1ed0
GM
735** Changes to TeX mode
736
737The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
738`latex-mode'.
739
a933dad1
DL
740** Changes to RefTeX mode
741
742*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
743 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
744 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
745 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
746 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
747 can be edited from that buffer.
748
749*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
750 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
751 `A' to use all marked entries).
752
753*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
754 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
755
756*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
757 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
758 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
759 been cited.
760
38de9631
GM
761** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
762The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
763semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
764in column 1 are always made leaves.
765
a933dad1
DL
766** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
767has the following new features:
768
769*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
770may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
771to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
772time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
773
774*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
775feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
776file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
777compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
778pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
779defaults to 1.
780
5d94f558 781** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
782file names.
783
424d8b44 784+++
a933dad1
DL
785** Tooltips.
786
787Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
788mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
789can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
790
791Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
792variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
793the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
794tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
795
424d8b44 796+++
a933dad1
DL
797** Customize changes
798
799*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
800`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
801cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
802
803*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
804Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
805default).
806
0ae51efb
GM
807*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
808between custom options. Example:
809
810 (defcustom default-input-method nil
811 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
812 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
813 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
814 :group 'mule
815 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
816 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
817
818This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
819current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
820first in a custom-set-variables statement.
821
a933dad1
DL
822** New features in evaluation commands
823
5e03eb84 824*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
825modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
826print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
827customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
828eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
829
5e03eb84
GM
830*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
831code when called with a prefix argument.
832
ead53494
GM
833** Ispell changes
834
37d8a691 835+++
bbe15990
EZ
836*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
837transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
838spell-checks the current buffer.
839
37d8a691 840+++
385ff9e3
GM
841*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
842added.
843
844*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
845correction is made and re-checked.
846
74ec6045 847*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
848
849*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
850cases.
851
852*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
853on syntax errors.
854
855*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
856end of the buffer.
857
a933dad1
DL
858** Dired changes
859
860*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
861command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
862is, delete only empty directories.
863
864*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
865command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
866copy directories recursively.
867
f6737cde
GM
868*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
869in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
870the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
871
2f72fd2f
GM
872*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
873replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
874directory.
875
7381ae05
MB
876*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
877a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
878This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
879will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
880accurate or inaccurate as it is.
881
e024b101
GM
882*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
883from ls switches.
884
a933dad1
DL
885** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
886use the -f option when sending mail.
887
b1c609b1
GM
888** CC mode changes.
889
890Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
891current user setups (although it's believed that these
892incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
893However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
894back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
895compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
896release.
897
7972fcfc
GM
898*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
899This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
900of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
901non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
902want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
903have to bother.
904
905Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
906situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 907and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
908If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
909the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
910by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
911
b1c609b1
GM
912*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
913When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
914variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
915take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
916is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
917settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
918possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
919Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
920
921By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
922special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
923the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
924of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
925above.
926
927Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
928when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
929function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
930call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
931then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
932values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
933only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
934function documentation for more info.
935
936The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
937especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
938with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
939intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
940such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
941is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
942configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
943global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
944
945(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
946
947**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
948This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
949
950This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
951variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
952completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
953the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
954empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
955style system.
956
957**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
958In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
959c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
960as far as possible.
961
962*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
963CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
964surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
965chapter about this in the manual.
966
967**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
968The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
969recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
970primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
971adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
972
973**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
974This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
975c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
976
977**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
978This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
979
980It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
981Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
982A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
983inside CC Mode.
984
985Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
986causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
987the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
988available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
989cc-mode/).
990
991**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
992The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
993specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
994literals.
995
996**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
997It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
998prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
999you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1000this function.
1001
1002*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1003It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1004to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1005struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1006Thanks to Eric Eide.
1007
1008*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1009It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1010opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1011
1012**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1013
1014*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1015See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1016better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1017and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1018
1019*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1020previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1021the column specified by comment-column.
1022
1023*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1024In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1025is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1026prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1027contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1028don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1029
1030*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1031instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1032arguments.
1033
1034*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1035
1036*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1037c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1038c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1039variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1040Provan).
1041
1042*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1043
c407c570
GM
1044** Makefile mode changes
1045
1046*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1047
5d94f558 1048*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1049Fontlock mode is active.
1050
87be76f6
GM
1051** Isearch changes
1052
3353ef5a
GM
1053*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1054so that searches can be resumed.
1055
1056*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1057respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1058that started the search.
1059
87be76f6 1060*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1061selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1062
c8a8458a 1063+++
87be76f6
GM
1064*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1065
d35fce81 1066Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1067`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1068search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1069before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1070highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1071`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1072
1073The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1074will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1075Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1076using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1077usual snappy response.
1078
1079If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1080matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1081set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1082isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1083
21bc6203 1084+++
35384f06
GM
1085** Changes in sort.el
1086
1087The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1088as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1089new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1090numeric base.
87be76f6 1091
d7b511c4
GM
1092** Changes to Ange-ftp
1093
424d8b44 1094+++
d7b511c4 1095*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1096names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1097sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1098
d7b511c4
GM
1099*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1100ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1101
9d453139
SS
1102*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1103output ^M at the end of lines.
1104
4b9347b3
GM
1105** Shell script mode changes.
1106
1107Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1108derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1109sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1110
79214ddf
FP
1111** Etags changes.
1112
1113*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1114
aca0be23 1115*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1116possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1117{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1118This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1119a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1120
79214ddf
FP
1121*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1122declarations when given the --declarations option.
1123
1124*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1125"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1126
1127*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1128types.
1129
de370c4c 1130*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1131
1132*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1133
1134*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1135are now tagged.
1136
1137*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1138variables are tagged.
1139
1140*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1141
8dc78b52
FP
1142*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1143for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1144
c8d94f86 1145+++
f6737cde
GM
1146** Changes in etags.el
1147
3f6e4b8b
GM
1148*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1149tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1150is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1151
f6737cde
GM
1152*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1153the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1154
1155If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1156FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1157TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1158obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1159
1160TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1161
1162FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1163List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1164
1165A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1166
1167 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1168 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1169 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1170
1171*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1172of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1173
1174*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1175names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1176
424d8b44 1177+++
fbc164de
PE
1178** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1179and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1180LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1181
c3eb1f10 1182+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1183** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1184Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
11858859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1186GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
11878859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1188releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1189(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1190
424d8b44 1191+++
163ea954 1192** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1193remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1194appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1195
1196** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1197
424d8b44 1198+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1199** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1200
6ab8d72d 1201+++
f6499c03 1202** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1203containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1204expression from that list, are not checked.
1205
5d94f558
SS
1206** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1207When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1208and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1209the buffer, just like for the local files.
1210
dc28878c
GM
1211** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1212
a933dad1
DL
1213** New modes and packages
1214
ff332647 1215+++
90cbf47e
GM
1216*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1217intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1218typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1219on certain projects.
1220
894ca69e 1221+++
90cbf47e 1222*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1223regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1224
d96d6bb0 1225 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1226
1227will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1228face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1229typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1230Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1231appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1232current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1233corresponding file is read.
1234
424d8b44 1235+++
d96d6bb0 1236*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1237Emacs is idle.
1238
31fc5d15
GM
1239*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1240parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1241
5cb6a58e
SM
1242*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1243package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1244be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1245
424d8b44 1246+++
578979ee
GM
1247*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1248facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1249separate Texinfo file.
1250
424d8b44
DL
1251+++
1252*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1253by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1254provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1255`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1256enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1257
424d8b44 1258+++
6abca616
EZ
1259*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1260without invoking external programs.
1261
1262The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1263and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1264`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1265is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1266Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1267
1268The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1269page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1270
719e2c6e 1271+++
5e5dff44
GM
1272*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1273authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1274
1275The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1276the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1277the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1278Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1279even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1280single step.
1281
1282On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1283matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1284probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1285contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1286
424d8b44 1287+++
f7136ee8
GM
1288*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1289unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1290actually modifying content of a buffer.
1291
bbd9b566
GM
1292*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1293PostScript.
1294
1295Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1296
1297The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1298
1299 ; comment (until end of line)
1300 A non-terminal
1301 "C" terminal
1302 ?C? special
1303 $A default non-terminal
1304 $"C" default terminal
1305 $?C? default special
1306 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1307 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1308 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1309 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1310 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1311 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1312 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1313 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1314 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1315 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1316 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1317 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1318 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1319 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1320 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1321
1322Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1323
99453a38
GM
1324*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1325align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1326determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1327example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1328equal signs of assignments.
1329
424d8b44 1330+++
559cee90
DL
1331*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1332paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1333
424d8b44 1334+++
6448a6b3
GM
1335*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1336list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1337buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1338customize the package.
1339
6344985d
GM
1340*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1341
249652b1
GM
1342*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1343replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1344is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1345and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1346not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1347which answers different needs.
1348
424d8b44 1349+++
3476b54a
GM
1350*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1351suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1352expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1353course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1354reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1355to be enabled.
1356
424d8b44 1357+++
8964fec7
SM
1358*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1359containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1360
424d8b44 1361+++
a933dad1
DL
1362*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1363
424d8b44 1364+++
a933dad1
DL
1365*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1366
1367*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1368
1369*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1370Pascal) language.
1371
f6499c03 1372+++
a933dad1
DL
1373*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1374the text at point.
1375
1376*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1377
424d8b44 1378+++
8d54eb69
DL
1379*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1380
a933dad1
DL
1381*** whitespace.el ???
1382
ebcfda83
GM
1383*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1384files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1385(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1386interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1387often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1388uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1389codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1390
1391*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1392
1393Here is an example of columns:
1394
1395horse apple bus
1396dog pineapple car EXTRA
1397porcupine strawberry airplane
1398
1399Doing the following settings:
1400
1401 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1402 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1403 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1404 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1405
1406
1407Selecting the lines above and typing:
1408
1409 M-x delimit-columns-region
1410
1411It results:
1412
1413[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1414[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1415[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1416
1417delim-col has the following options:
1418
1419 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1420 before all columns.
1421
1422 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1423 between each column.
1424
1425 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1426 after all columns.
1427
1428 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1429 each column.
1430
1431delim-col has the following commands:
1432
1433 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1434 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1435
424d8b44 1436+++
f507826c 1437*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1438were operated on recently.
1439
1440M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1441
31fc5d15
GM
1442M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1443recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1444
31fc5d15
GM
1445M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1446filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1447file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1448
31fc5d15
GM
1449- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1450- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1451- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1452
31fc5d15
GM
1453The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1454dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1455
8062f458
DL
1456*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1457text.
1458
424d8b44 1459+++
36e24b82 1460*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1461of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1462specific to Message mode.
1463
424d8b44 1464+++
36e24b82
DL
1465*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1466viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1467with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1468
424d8b44 1469+++
aaa659ef
DL
1470*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1471interface to access directory servers using different directory
1472protocols. It has a separate manual.
1473
eee54b0e
DL
1474*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1475for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1476
424d8b44 1477+++
612839b6
GM
1478*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1479
5d94f558 1480*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1481minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1482
399da7e3
DL
1483*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1484with the diary features.
1485
6e417ca5
DL
1486*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1487numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1488
4a27bdfb
GM
1489*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1490Fill mode.
1491
a933dad1
DL
1492** Withdrawn packages
1493
1494*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1495functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1496
3261c1d8
DL
1497*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1498
1499*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1500
1501\f
1502* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1503(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1504
424d8b44
DL
1505+++
1506** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1507is running in batch mode. For example,
1508
1509 (message "%s" (read t))
1510
1511will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1512to standard output.
1513
1514+++
1515** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1516`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1517
ead53494
GM
1518** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1519will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1520frame or window.
1521
f6499c03 1522+++
27848c01
GM
1523** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1524were added
1525
1526- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1527
1528Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1529a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1530
1531- Function: remq ELT LIST
1532
1533Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1534comparison is done with `eq'.
1535
1536** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1537
b548072f
GM
1538** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1539has been changed.
1540
424d8b44 1541+++
07b14857
KH
1542** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1543without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1544convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1545
9662da0b
GM
1546** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1547or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1548
7fce7efb
DL
1549** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1550function was declared obsolete.
1551
5d94f558 1552** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1553retained as an alias).
1554
f98d3086
SM
1555** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1556It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1557is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1558
87efd256
GM
1559** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1560
1561- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1562
1563Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1564MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1565
67c9a1d2
GM
1566** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1567
1568- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1569
1570Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1571
1572This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1573calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1574argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1575value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1576returned.
1577
1578Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1579if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1580it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1581minibuffer even if it is active.
1582
1583Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1584counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1585too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1586and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1587`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1588entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1589
1590ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1591ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1592ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1593ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1594ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1595If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1596Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1597
ead53494
GM
1598** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1599event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1600argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1601
25fa6deb
GM
1602** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1603call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1604message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1605Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1606
5d94f558 1607** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1608meaning no limit.
1609
5d94f558 1610** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1611coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1612DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1613
80c05bd3 1614** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1615of a primitive.
1616
80c05bd3
DL
1617** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1618buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1619This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1620than replacing the local map.
1621
4bc7a543
DL
1622** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1623after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1624
1625** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1626
f6499c03 1627+++
f0298744
DL
1628** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1629promised long ago.
1630
5d94f558 1631** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1632\f
1633* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1634
1635Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1636--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1637When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1638so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1639
85c75536
MB
1640*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1641buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1642the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1643restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1644
0b8a3a6d
DL
1645*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1646`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1647when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1648multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1649
1650*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1651`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1652contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1653
1654*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1655changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1656[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1657regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1658the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1659extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1660bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1661eight-bit-graphic.
1662
1663** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1664
1665A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1666a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1667character set as previously.
1668
1669*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1670They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1671modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1672
1673CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1674characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1675range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1676case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1677
1678FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1679name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1680
1681*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1682registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1683"fontset-default".
1684
1685*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1686argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1687
1688** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1689composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1690buffers and strings.
1691
1692*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1693character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1694code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1695have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1696composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1697composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1698The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1699also been deleted.
1700
1701*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1702specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1703`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1704
1705*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1706MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1707composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1708may differ between buffer and string text.
1709
1710*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1711COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1712
1713*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1714directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1715Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1716`composition' from STRING.
1717
1718*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1719a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1720
1721*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1722obsolete.
1723
1724** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1725Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1726character set is not used.
1727
1728** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1729`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1730X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1731
1732+++
1733** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1734are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 17350xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1736
399da7e3 1737+++
f0124b4a
DL
1738** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1739that offset in the file before writing.
1740
f98d3086
SM
1741** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1742compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1743
612839b6
GM
1744** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1745`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1746from which the command was issued.
1747
1748** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1749`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1750`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1751additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1752operate on.
1753
271b4185
GM
1754** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1755to `window-buffer-height'.
1756
1757- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1758
1759Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1760The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1761lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1762
1763Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1764respectively.
1765
1766If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1767COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1768
1769The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1770obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1771on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1772
1773Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1774buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1775possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1776is currently displayed in some window.
1777
3c30cb6e
DL
1778** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1779argument function's results.
1780
62f20204
GM
1781** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1782signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1783
c0510d27
GM
1784** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1785header is the list of headers passed to it.
1786
1787** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1788ignores differences in case and text representation.
1789
1790** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1791cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1792as follows:
1793
1794 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1795 nil don't display a cursor
1796 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1797 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1798 others display a box cursor.
1799
9a0dd3dc
GM
1800** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1801an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1802defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1803set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1804
d7b511c4 1805** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1806specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1807the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1808text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1809
1810Example:
1811
1812 (string-to-syntax "()")
1813 => (4 . 41)
1814
1fa28578
GM
1815** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1816other than 10.
1817
1818*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1819INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1820
5d94f558 1821 #b1111
1fa28578 1822 => 15
5d94f558 1823 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1824 => -15
1825
1826*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1827
5d94f558 1828 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1829 => 438
1830
1831*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1832
5d94f558 1833 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1834 => 48815
1835
1836*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1837
5d94f558 1838 #2R-111
1fa28578 1839 => -7
5d94f558 1840 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1841 => 267
1842
3d4ff2dd 1843** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1844the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1845and isn't a string.
1846
3d4ff2dd
GM
1847** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1848a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1849value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1850not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1851
16ce590d
DL
1852+++
1853** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1854
73825616 1855** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1856for a regexp in a string.
1857
1858** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1859`mouse-position-function'.
1860
723e779c
GM
1861** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1862that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1863
d1e103b2
GM
1864** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1865Keywords are now always considered constants.
1866
31047e0d
DL
1867+++
1868** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1869returns it.
1870
7a85e4df
GM
1871** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1872returned by function `recent-keys'.
1873
02b14400
RS
1874+++
1875** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1876can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1877Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1878etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1879mode.
404fa7d6 1880
02b14400 1881+++
8964fec7
SM
1882** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1883and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1884
02b14400
RS
1885+++
1886** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1887has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1888function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1889returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1890been performed."
1891
1892When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1893and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1894hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1895then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1896
02b14400 1897+++
81da8b32
GM
1898** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1899In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1900and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1901
02b14400 1902+++
9e207b90
GM
1903** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1904with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1905specified table.
1906
1907 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1908
1909Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1910TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1911saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1912what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1913
02b14400 1914+++
d7f89643 1915** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1916Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1917
02b14400 1918+++
dde9e75a
GM
1919** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1920removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1921
02b14400 1922+++
9da30515
GM
1923** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1924instead of being optional.
1925
02b14400 1926+++
d20679eb
GM
1927** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1928modify read-only text.
1929
02b14400 1930+++
fbc164de
PE
1931** New functions and variables for locales.
1932
1933The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1934decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1935time functions like strftime. The new variables
1936`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1937locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1938
1939The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1940environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1941the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1942environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1943not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1944`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1945`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1946
02b14400 1947+++
863476d1
SM
1948** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1949To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1950modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1951start sequences.
1952
02b14400 1953+++
ef6d912c
GM
1954** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1955because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1956
02b14400 1957+++
a933dad1
DL
1958** New function `propertize'
1959
1960The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1961strings with text properties.
1962
1963- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1964
1965Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1966by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1967PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1968specified value of that property. Example:
1969
1970 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1971
1972+++
1973** push and pop macros.
1974
02b14400
RS
1975Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1976are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1977as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1978
1979(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1980(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1981 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1982
02b14400
RS
1983** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1984
6c7fd5aa
RS
1985Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1986are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1987
1988(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1989 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1990 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1991 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1992
1993(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1994 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1995 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1996 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1997
a933dad1
DL
1998+++
1999** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2000as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2001
2002[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2003[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2004[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2005[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2006[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2007 space, and DEL.
2008[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2009 and DEL.
2010[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2011 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2012 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2013[:alpha:] matches letters.
2014 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2015 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2016[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2017[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2018[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2019[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2020 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2021 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2022[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2023[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2024[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2025
2026+++
2027** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2028
2029The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2030
2031- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2032
2033The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2034are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2035
2036:test TEST
2037
2038TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2039Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2040it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2041
2042:size SIZE
2043
2044SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2045many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2046
2047:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2048
2049REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2050full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2051size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
20521.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2053old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2054
2055:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2056
2057THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2058hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2059(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2060
2061:weakness WEAK
2062
b548072f
GM
2063WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2064`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2065`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2066collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2067outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2068
2069- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2070
2071Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2072
2073- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2074
2075Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2076
2077- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2078
2079Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2080values are shared.
2081
2082- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2083
2084Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2085
2086- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2087
2088Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2089
2090- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2091
2092Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2093
2094- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2095
2096Returns the size of TABLE.
2097
d96d6bb0 2098- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2099
2100Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2101
2102- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2103
2104Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2105
2106- Function: clrhash TABLE
2107
2108Clear TABLE.
2109
2110- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2111
2112Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2113not found.
2114
79214ddf 2115- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2116
2117Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2118another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2119
2120- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2121
2122Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2123
2124- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2125
2126Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2127arguments KEY and VALUE.
2128
2129- Function: sxhash OBJ
2130
2131Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2132
2133- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2134
2135Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2136a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2137comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2138and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2139of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2140
2141TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2142
2143HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2144code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2145integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2146
2147Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2148be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2149
2150 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2151 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2152
2153 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2154 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2155
79214ddf 2156 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2157 'case-fold-string-hash))
2158
2159 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2160
2161+++
2162** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2163
2164It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2165circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2166a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2167
2168+++
2169** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2170
2171If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2172#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2173
a933dad1
DL
2174+++
2175** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2176t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2177specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2178is too short to reach that column.
2179
2180+++
2181** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2182now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2183after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2184two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2185
2186If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2187perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2188and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2189
2190+++
2191** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2192to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2193
2194+++
2195** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2196calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2197
2198+++
2199** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2200directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2201small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2202small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2203temporary-file-directory instead.
2204
2205+++
2206** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2207the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2208`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2209hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2210
2211+++
2212** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2213elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2214
2215+++
2216** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2217
2218make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2219creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2220ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2221
2222+++
2223** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2224
2225The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2226on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2227is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2228never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2229ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2230overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2231
2232If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2233that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2234to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2235The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2236
2237+++
2238** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2239
2240Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2241If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2242ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2243result string.
2244
2245Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2246string where arguments appear in the result string.
2247
2248Example:
2249
2250 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2251 (s2 "world"))
2252 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2253 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2254 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2255
2256results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2257
2258+++
2259** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2260
2261Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2262The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2263argument in it.
2264
2265 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2266 (arg "world"))
2267 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2268 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2269 (message msg arg))
2270
2271+++
2272** Sound support
2273
2274Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2275(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2276
2277Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2278(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2279to enable sound support.
2280
2281Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2282list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2283when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2284functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2285sound to play, before playing the sound.
2286
2287The following sound properties are supported:
2288
2289- `:file FILE'
2290
2291FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2292searched relative to `data-directory'.
2293
6fb40beb
GM
2294- `:data DATA'
2295
2296DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2297may be present, but not both.
2298
a933dad1
DL
2299- `:volume VOLUME'
2300
2301VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
23020..1. This property is optional.
2303
2304Other properties are ignored.
2305
2306** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2307
2308** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2309a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2310
2311** Changes to garbage collection
2312
2313*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2314of live and free strings.
2315
2316*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2317strings that have been consed so far.
2318
a933dad1 2319\f
04545643
GM
2320* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2321Lisp Manual
2322
9a8d84ca
DL
2323+++
2324** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2325
2326** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2327image.
2328
2329- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2330
2331Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2332
2333SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2334measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2335character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2336font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2337FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2338
f6499c03 2339+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2340** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2341satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2342
2343+++
2344** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2345optional.
2346
f6499c03
DL
2347+++
2348** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2349below).
04545643
GM
2350
2351\f
a933dad1
DL
2352* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2353
2354Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2355--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2356When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2357so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2358
f6d3257b
GM
2359** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2360to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2361
2362Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2363text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2364is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2365your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2366laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2367just display it black instead.
2368
2369This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2370a line like
2371
2372 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2373
2374in your `.emacs'.
2375
a933dad1
DL
2376** New face implementation.
2377
2378Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2379font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2380
2381+++
2382*** New faces.
2383
2384Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2385
2386 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2387
a933dad1
DL
2388 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2389 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2390
a933dad1 2391 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2392
a933dad1 2393 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2394
a933dad1 2395 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2396
a933dad1 2397 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2398
a933dad1
DL
2399 7. Background color.
2400
2401 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2402
2403 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2404
2405 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2406
2407 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2408
2409 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2410 color.
2411
2412 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2413 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2414
2415Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2416same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2417frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2418faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2419with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2420attributes mentioned above.
2421
2422There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2423definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2424created frames.
79214ddf 2425
a933dad1
DL
2426A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2427have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2428`fully-specified'.
2429
2430+++
2431*** Face merging.
2432
2433The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2434combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2435aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2436properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2437that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2438results in a fully-specified face.
2439
2440+++
2441*** Face realization.
2442
2443After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2444merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2445realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2446available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2447face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2448cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2449
2450Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2451character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2452for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2453charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2454
2455Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2456specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2457being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2458the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2459statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2460
2461In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2462`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
24630x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2464the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2465initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2466Emacs.
2467
2468Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2469`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2470registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2471with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2472
2473++++
2474**** Clearing face caches.
2475
2476The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2477on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2478unused fonts.
2479
2480+++
2481*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2482
a933dad1
DL
2483Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2484given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2485for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2486
2487If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2488pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2489family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2490property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2491an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2492
2493Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2494against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2495match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2496
2497Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2498
2499The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2500attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2501face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2502names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2503that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2504width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2505to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2506
2507Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2508specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2509face doesn't exist.
2510
2511+++
2512**** Scalable fonts
2513
2514Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2515since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2516servers.
2517
2518To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2519`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2520scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2521Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2522scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2523that list. Example:
2524
2525 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2526
2527allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2528
2529+++
2530*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2531
2532- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2533
2534Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2535is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2536string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2537
2538If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2539the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2540FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2541POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2542SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2543These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2544if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2545REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2546the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2547of the face font sort order.
2548
79214ddf 2549- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2550
2551Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2552omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2553(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2554non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2555
2556- Variable: font-list-limit
2557
2558Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2559won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2560matching font. The default is currently 100.
2561
2562+++
2563*** Setting face attributes.
2564
2565For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2566with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2567implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2568`face-attribute'.
2569
2570Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2571symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2572
2573The following attributes are recognized:
2574
2575`:family'
2576
2577VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2578or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2579and `?' are allowed.
2580
2581`:width'
2582
2583VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2584It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2585`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2586`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2587
2588`:height'
2589
2590VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
25911/10 pt.
2592
2593`:weight'
2594
2595VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2596symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2597`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2598
2599`:slant'
2600
2601VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2602symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2603`reverse-oblique'.
2604
2605`:foreground', `:background'
2606
2607VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2608
2609`:underline'
2610
2611VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2612VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2613a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2614don't underline.
2615
2616`:overline'
2617
2618VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2619VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2620string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2621overline.
2622
2623`:strike-through'
2624
2625VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2626striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2627face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2628is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2629
2630`:box'
2631
2632VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2633around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2634VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2635of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2636and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2637VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2638:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2639the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2640specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2641defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2642the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2643color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2644should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2645like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2646that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2647the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2648box.
2649
2650`:inverse-video'
2651
2652VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2653inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2654
2655`:stipple'
2656
2657If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2658The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2659searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2660HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2661is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2662explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2663
2664For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2665and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2666
2667`:font'
2668
2669Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2670XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2671is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2672versions of Emacs.
2673
2674For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2675be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2676must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2677
2678Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2679`defface'.
2680
2681*** Face attributes and X resources
2682
2683The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2684from X resources:
2685
2686 Face attribute X resource class
2687-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2688 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2689 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2690 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2691 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2692 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2693 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2694 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2695 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2696 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2697 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2698 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2699 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2700 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2701 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2702 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2703 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2704 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2705 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2706 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2707
2708+++
2709*** Text property `face'.
2710
2711The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2712specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2713specification can be
2714
27151. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2716
27172. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2718 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2719 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2720 for face attribute names.
2721
27223. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2723 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2724 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2725
2726+++
2727** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2728
acf3ecb7
EZ
2729The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2730on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2731the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2732default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2733`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2734used to clear the mapping table.
2735
acf3ecb7
EZ
2736** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2737
2738The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2739and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2740type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2741color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2742display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2743old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2744`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2745compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2746should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2747modify their color-related behavior.
2748
2749The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2750any frame type.
2751
8a5719f0
EZ
2752** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2753
2754The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2755`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2756`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2757`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2758`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2759`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2760display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2761the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2762platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2763
a933dad1
DL
2764+++
2765** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2766
463cac2d 2767This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2768
2769The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2770end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2771Otherwise, it returns zero.
2772
463cac2d
GM
2773** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2774
2775There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2776buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2777property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2778
9a9dfda8 2779Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2780forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2781to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2782not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2783commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2784boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2785`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2786functions.
463cac2d
GM
2787
2788Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2789a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2790editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2791
9a9dfda8
GM
2792The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2793
59927f88 2794- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2795
2796Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2797
9a9dfda8
GM
2798A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2799If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2800constrained position if that is is different.
2801
2802If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2803positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2804ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2805constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2806as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2807is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2808fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2809the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2810also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2811
2812If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2813NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2814unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2815C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2816only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2817
59927f88
MB
2818If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2819a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2820
2821Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2822
2823- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2824
59927f88 2825Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2826A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2827If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2828
2829- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2830
2831Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2832A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2833If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2834If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2835field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2836
2837- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2838
2839Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2840A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2841If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2842If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2843then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2844
2845- Function: field-string &optional POS
2846
2847Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2848A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2849If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2850
2851- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2852
2853Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2854A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2855If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2856
a933dad1
DL
2857+++
2858** Image support.
2859
2860Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2861strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2862(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2863replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2864
2865If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2866`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2867AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2868window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2869area.
2870
2871IMAGE is an image specification.
2872
2873*** Image specifications
2874
2875Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2876is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2877specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2878symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2879described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2880
2881The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2882
2883`:ascent ASCENT'
2884
576da55d
GM
2885ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2886If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2887to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2888
2889If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2890image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2891
5d94f558 2892If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2893centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2894of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2895overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2896
2897`:margin MARGIN'
2898
79214ddf 2899MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2900margin around the image. Default is 0.
2901
2902`:relief RELIEF'
2903
2904RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2905around an image.
2906
2907`:algorithm ALGO'
2908
2909Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2910be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2911supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2912which is intended to display images "disabled."
2913
2914`:heuristic-mask BG'
2915
2916If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2917background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2918determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2919corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2920the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2921be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2922background of the image.
2923
2924`:file FILE'
2925
2926Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2927search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2928building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2929may be present in the image specification.
2930
518df5c4
GM
2931`:data DATA'
2932
2933Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2934supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2935present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2936support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2937
a933dad1
DL
2938*** Supported image types
2939
b246b1f6 2940**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2941
2942XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2943properties supported are
2944
2945`:foreground FG'
2946
2947FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2948is the frame's foreground.
2949
2950`:background FG'
2951
2952BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2953the frame's background color.
2954
2955XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2956case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2957instead of a `:file' property.
2958
2959`:width WIDTH'
2960
2961WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2962
2963`:height HEIGHT'
2964
2965HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2966
2967`:data DATA'
2968
2969DATA must be either
2970
2971 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2972 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2973
2974 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2975
2976 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2977 bitmap.
2978
c76e04a8
GM
2979 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2980 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2981 in the file.
2982
a933dad1
DL
2983**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2984
2985XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2986`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2987found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2988`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2989
2990Additional image properties supported are:
2991
2992`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2993
2994SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2995name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2996name.
2997
2998XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2999add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3000
a933dad1
DL
3001The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3002to display compressed images.
3003
3004**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3005
3006PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
3007mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
3008defined.
3009
3010**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3011
3012Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3013package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3014are:
3015
a933dad1
DL
3016**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3017
3018Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3019package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3020properties defined.
3021
3022**** GIF, image type `gif'
3023
3024Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3025`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3026
3027Additional image properties supported are:
3028
3029`:index INDEX'
3030
3031INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3032multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3033
3034This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3035For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3036at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3037every 0.1 seconds.
3038
3039(defun show-anim (file max)
3040 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3041 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3042
3043(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3044 (when (= idx max)
3045 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3046 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3047 (save-excursion
3048 (set-buffer buffer)
3049 (goto-char (point-min))
3050 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3051 (insert-image img "x"))
3052 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3053
3054**** PNG, image type `png'
3055
3056Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3057package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3058properties defined.
3059
3060**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3061
3062Additional image properties supported are:
3063
3064`:pt-width WIDTH'
3065
3066WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3067integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3068
3069`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3070
3071HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3072must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3073
3074`:bounding-box BOX'
3075
3076BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3077the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3078files. This is an required property.
3079
3080Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3081lisp/gs.el.
3082
3083*** Lisp interface.
3084
79214ddf
FP
3085The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3086which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3087
3088Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3089they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3090The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3091manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3092images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3093
3094*** Simplified image API, image.el
3095
3096The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3097creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3098can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3099define an image based on available image types. The functions
3100`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3101buffer.
3102
3103+++
3104** Display margins.
3105
3106Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3107and images.
3108
3109To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3110`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3111`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3112obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3113`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3114the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3115of the display margins.
3116
3117You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3118containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3119one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3120string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3121in this file).
3122
3123+++
3124** Help display
3125
3126Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3127moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3128`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3129that have a `help-echo' property.
3130
9662da0b 3131If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3132is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3133the window in which the help was found.
3134
3135If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3136`help-echo' text property was found.
3137
3138If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3139POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3140
3141If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3142the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3143mouse.
d5aa31d8 3144
9662da0b
GM
3145If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3146string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3147
3148For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3149determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3150property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3151For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3152used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3153
3154The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3155the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3156causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3157
3158+++
3159** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3160
3161The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3162This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3163
3164The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3165scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3166The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3167scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3168used.
3169
79214ddf
FP
3170 (global-set-key [A-down]
3171 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3172 (interactive)
79214ddf 3173 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3174 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3175 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3176 #'(lambda ()
3177 (interactive)
79214ddf 3178 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3179 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3180
3181+++
3182** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3183
3184Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3185when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3186variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3187is called with one argument, POS.
3188
3189At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3190characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3191as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3192property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3193`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3194
3195+++
3196** Tool bar support.
3197
3198Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3199parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3200controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3201suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3202`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3203automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3204
f6499c03
DL
3205before this facility can be useful, we need people to donate icons.
3206
a933dad1
DL
3207*** Tool bar item definitions
3208
3209Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3210`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3211where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3212
a933dad1
DL
3213CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3214evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3215the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3216property (see below).
79214ddf 3217
a933dad1
DL
3218BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3219binding are currently ignored.
3220
3221The following properties are recognized:
3222
3223`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3224
a933dad1
DL
3225FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3226or disabled.
79214ddf 3227
a933dad1 3228`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3229
a933dad1 3230FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3231
a933dad1
DL
3232`:filter FUNCTION'
3233
3234FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3235FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3236used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3237
a933dad1
DL
3238`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3239
3240TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3241and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3242
a933dad1
DL
3243`:image IMAGES'
3244
3245IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3246image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3247meaning of each of the four elements:
3248
3249 Index Use when item is
3250 ----------------------------------------
3251 0 enabled and selected
3252 1 enabled and deselected
3253 2 disabled and selected
3254 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3255
4ba7246d
GM
3256If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3257algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3258
a933dad1 3259`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3260
a933dad1
DL
3261Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3262is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3263
3264*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3265
3266If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3267resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3268than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3269
79214ddf 3270If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3271raised when the mouse moves over them.
3272
3273You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3274`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3275pixels. Default is 1.
3276
3277You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3278`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3279
3280*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3281
3282You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3283a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3284
3285 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3286 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3287 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3288
3289is the original tool bar item definition, then
3290
3291 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3292
3293makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3294item.
3295
3296** Mode line changes.
3297
3298+++
3299*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3300
3301The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3302that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3303a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3304
33051. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3306a `local-map' text property.
3307
33082. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3309that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3310
33113. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3312is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3313`local-map' property.
3314
3315The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3316properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3317example.
3318
54522c9f
GM
3319*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3320evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3321
a933dad1
DL
3322+++
3323*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3324variable mode-line-format to nil.
3325
3326+++
3327*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3328
3329This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3330`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3331completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3332`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3333line.
3334
3335The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3336`header-line'.
3337
3338The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3339position in the header-line.
3340
3341+++
3342** Text property `display'
3343
3344The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3345also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3346`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3347below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3348
3349*** Variable width and height spaces
3350
3351To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3352specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3353`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3354area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3355marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3356displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3357simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3358
3359The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3360PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3361properties described below.
3362
3363The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3364characters having the `display' property.
3365
3366- :width WIDTH
3367
3368Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3369character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3370
3371- :relative-width FACTOR
3372
3373Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3374first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3375same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3376width of that character by FACTOR.
3377
3378- :align-to HPOS
3379
3380Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3381value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3382
3383Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3384
3385- :height HEIGHT
3386
3387Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3388normal line height.
3389
3390- :relative-height FACTOR
3391
3392The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3393of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3394
3395- :ascent ASCENT
3396
3397Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3398used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3399baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3400equal to 100.
3401
3402You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3403
3404*** Images
3405
3406A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3407. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3408in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3409their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3410the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3411`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3412area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3413the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3414as display specification.
3415
3416*** Other display properties
3417
3418- :space-width FACTOR
3419
3420Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3421should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3422integer or float.
3423
3424- :height HEIGHT
3425
3426Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3427
3428If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3429means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3430the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3431``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3432a font is available counts as a step.
3433
3434If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3435as tall as the frame's default font.
3436
3437If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3438height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3439
3440Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3441`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3442
3443- :raise FACTOR
3444
3445FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3446font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3447raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3448amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3449`:height' subproperty.
3450
3451*** Conditional display properties
3452
3453All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3454has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3455applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3456During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3457the text having the `display' property.
3458
3459The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3460`(:when t SPEC)'.
3461
3462+++
3463** New menu separator types.
3464
3465Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3466item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3467treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3468to specify other menu separator types.
3469
3470- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3471
3472No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3473separator occurs.
3474
3475- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3476
3477A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3478
3479- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3480
3481A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3482
3483- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3484
3485A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3486
3487- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3488
3489A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3490
3491- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3492
3493A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3494displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3495
3496- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3497
3498A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3499
3500- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3501
3502A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3503
3504- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3505
3506A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3507
3508- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3509
3510Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3511
3512- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3513
3514Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3515
3516- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3517
3518Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3519
3520- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3521
3522Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3523
3524Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3525the corresponding single-line separators.
3526
3527+++
3528** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3529
3530The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3531`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3532Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3533that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3534default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3535default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3536default foreground is black.
3537
3538The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3539(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3540`ScrollBarBackground').
3541
3542Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3543settings for scroll bar colors.
3544
3545+++
3546** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3547display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3548
3549---
3550** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3551starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3552on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3553line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3554the original window start.
3555
3556---
3557** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3558`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3559now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3560
3561+++
3562** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3563
3564A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3565`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3566windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3567other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3568
3569The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3570fixed-width and fixed-height.
3571
3572 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3573
3574A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3575fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3576window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3577change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3578temporarily to nil, for example
3579
3580 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3581 (enlarge-window 10))
3582
79214ddf 3583Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3584or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3585
3586** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3587terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3588to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3589overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3590horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3591support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3592
3787e12e
GM
3593
3594^L
3595* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3596
3597** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3598input.
3599
3600** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3601
3602** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3603
3604** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3605only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3606exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3607(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3608(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3609
3610** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3611been added.
3612
3613^L
3614* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3615
3616** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3617
3618^L
3619* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3620
3621** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3622M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3623\f
3624* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3625
3626** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3627
3628You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3629Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3630`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3631
3632If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3633is the one that is used.
3634
3635** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3636the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3637Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3638separate from the command's regular output.
3639Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3640says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3641In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3642the buffer name.
3643
3644When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3645output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3646it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3647cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3648
3649** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3650the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3651is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3652created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3653
3654** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3655example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3656match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3657quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3658
3659** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3660now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3661if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3662they never ignore case.
3663
3664** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3665under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3666applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3667of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3668just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3669convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3670part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3671
3672If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3673the same format that was used in the file before.
3674
3675You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3676`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3677
3678** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3679renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3680This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3681
3682** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3683The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3684buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3685your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3686is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3687end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3688Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3689
3690The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3691eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3692control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3693format. You can now customize these variables.
3694
3695** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3696filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3697filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3698enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3699
3700** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3701in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3702windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3703
3704** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3705dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3706doesn't have any effect.
3707
3708** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3709not one per buffer.
3710
3711** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3712use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3713 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3714
3715** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3716To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3717`auto-show-mode' command.
3718
3719** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3720avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3721versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3722choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3723occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3724
3725** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3726cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3727
3728** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3729character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3730feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3731
3732** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3733the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3734interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3735and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3736
3737** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3738
3739The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3740that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3741one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3742codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3743set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3744
3745Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3746from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3747
3748IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3749equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3750a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3751`?' on other systems.
3752
3753IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3754feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3755Unix.
3756
3757Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3758current codepage when it starts.
3759
3760** Mail changes
3761
3762*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3763`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3764appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3765non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3766MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3767headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3768latin-1:
3769
3770 MIME-version: 1.0
3771 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3772 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3773
3774*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3775default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3776default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3777sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3778buffer-file-coding-system.
3779
3780You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3781sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3782mail.
3783
3784*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3785if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3786Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3787list of possible coding systems.
3788
3789** CC Mode changes
3790
3791*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3792modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3793longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3794docstring for details.
3795
3796*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3797symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3798found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3799prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3800lineup functions use this feature currently.
3801
3802*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3803"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3804
3805*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3806"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3807
3808*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3809from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3810symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3811c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3812anonymous classes.
3813
3814*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3815syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3816
3817*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3818inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3819support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3820function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3821
3822*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3823(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3824brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3825c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3826(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3827
3828*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3829
3830*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3831
3832*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3833for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3834
3835*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3836
3837*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3838associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3839This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3840circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3841class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3842
3843** Gnus changes.
3844
3845*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3846added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3847Gnus manual for the full story.
3848
3849*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3850before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3851group, which is created automatically.
3852
3853*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3854values.
3855
3856*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3857
3858*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3859outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3860
3861*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3862`C-u C-c C-c'.
3863
3864*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3865
3866*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3867re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3868
3869*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3870
3871*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3872Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3873
3874*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3875`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3876
3877*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3878control over simplification.
3879
3880*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3881
3882*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3883limit.
3884
3885*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3886
3887*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3888
3889*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3890If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3891rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3892
3893*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3894`a' forces normal posting method.
3895
3896*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3897-- `W d'.
3898
3899*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3900to a non-nil value.
3901
3902*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3903where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3904
3905*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3906has been added.
3907
3908*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3909
3910*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3911
3912*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3913`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3914
3915*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3916`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3917
3918*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3919
3920*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3921been added.
3922
3923*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3924`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3925
3926*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3927updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3928
3929*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3930
3931*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3932
3933*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3934
3935** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3936
3937*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3938options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3939nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3940
3941*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3942TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3943of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3944TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3945can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3946
3947*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3948All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3949but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3950the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3951
3952*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3953the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3954buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3955mismatch.
3956
3957** Changes to RefTeX mode
3958
3959*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3960file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3961
3962*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3963lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3964characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3965removed from the label.
3966
3967*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3968a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3969
3970*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3971customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3972
3973*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3974`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3975expressions.
3976
3977*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3978
3979** New/deleted modes and packages
3980
3981*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3982SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3983
3984*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3985editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3986SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3987
3988*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3989changes with a special face.
3990
3991*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3992this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3993Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3994\f
3995* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3996
3997** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3998This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3999conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4000and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4001check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4002
4003The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4004Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4005distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4006
4007** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4008MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4009controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4010directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4011Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4012on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4013string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4014program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4015printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4016
4017** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4018output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4019available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4020input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4021temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4022program.
4023
4024An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4025and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4026programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4027automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4028as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4029ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4030
4031** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4032a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4033MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4034was not documented clearly before.
4035
4036** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4037This includes Tetris and Snake.
4038\f
4039* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4040
4041** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4042return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4043They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4044meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4045
4046** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4047WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4048and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4049
4050** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4051
4052*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4053It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4054
4055*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4056the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4057integers.
4058
4059** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4060files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4061arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4062file names and attributes are returned.
4063
4064** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4065sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4066accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4067It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4068returns the result.
4069
4070** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4071to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4072
4073** New functions for base64 conversion:
4074
4075The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4076into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4077performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4078optionally.
4079
4080Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4081job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4082
4083**
4084The new function process-running-child-p
4085will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4086terminal to its own child process.
4087
4088** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4089when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4090to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4091itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4092
4093** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4094be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4095
4096** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4097:included is an alias for :visible.
4098
4099easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4100easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4101to move or copy menu entries.
4102
4103** Multibyte editing changes
4104
4105*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4106an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4107make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4108work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4109char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4110 (setq char (sref str idx)
4111 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4112The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4113
4114If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4115(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4116 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4117
4118*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4119region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4120deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4121
4122 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4123
4124This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4125across the boundary.
4126
4127*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4128`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4129 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4130 contains 8-bit characters.
4131 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4132 contains invalid characters.
4133
4134*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4135text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4136preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4137text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4138way.
4139
4140*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4141If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4142end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4143prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4144
4145*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4146compose Thai characters in a string.
4147
4148** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4149argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4150for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4151menus should always use the third argument.
4152
4153** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4154read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4155arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4156input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4157
4158** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4159of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4160programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4161inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4162
4163** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4164the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4165returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4166echo area contents.
4167
4168 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4169
4170** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4171NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4172requested feature cannot be loaded.
4173
4174** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4175foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4176means to clear out that attribute.
4177
4178** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4179gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4180
4181** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4182read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4183unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4184end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4185
4186** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4187the gap of the current buffer.
4188
4189** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4190to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4191current buffer.
4192
4193** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4194facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4195These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4196it back in after any modifications have been made.
4197\f
4198* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4199
4200** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4201the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4202/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4203directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4204subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4205
4206Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4207names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4208Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4209which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4210these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4211
4212Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4213starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4214time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4215
4216This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4217Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4218to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4219subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4220`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4221results.
4222
4223** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4224GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4225that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4226fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4227\f
4228* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4229
4230** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4231including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4232it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4233perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4234
4235** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4236specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4237region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4238further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4239command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4240within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4241are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4242region.
4243
4244In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4245selective undo.
4246
4247** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4248unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4249buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4250effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4251Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4252
4253The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4254though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4255-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4256load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4257
4258** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4259no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4260enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4261something that most users not do.
4262
4263** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4264operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4265The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4266applications.
4267
4268C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4269pasting operations.
4270
4271** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4272setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4273like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4274printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4275`ps-printer-name'.
4276
4277** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4278minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4279any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4280except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4281incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4282hits a new word.
4283
4284Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4285Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4286to be confused by TeX commands.
4287
4288You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4289correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4290clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4291of various alternative replacements and actions.
4292
4293Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4294the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4295corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4296alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4297flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4298
4299Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4300flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4301
4302** Changes in input method usage.
4303
4304Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4305the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4306respectively.
4307
4308You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4309
4310If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4311of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4312
4313The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4314that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4315
4316 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4317
4318 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4319
4320 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4321 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4322
4323 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4324 given in the following case:
4325 o When you are using a complex input method.
4326 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4327
4328If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4329input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4330and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4331setting it to t is helpful.
4332
4333The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4334
4335In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4336keys:
4337 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4338 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4339 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4340These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4341environment.
4342
4343** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4344names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4345minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4346get
4347
4348 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4349
4350which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4351
4352Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4353Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4354
4355** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4356at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4357its owner and group.
4358
4359** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4360Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4361
4362** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4363contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4364
4365** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4366which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4367in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4368by the left edge of the rectangle.
4369
4370** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4371increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4372C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4373for writing keyboard macros.
4374
4375** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4376files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4377frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4378the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4379additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4380info.
4381
4382** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4383
4384** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4385query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4386contents only.
4387
4388** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4389confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4390the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4391says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4392
4393** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4394non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4395literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4396
4397** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4398now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4399Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4400inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4401
4402** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4403failure if the command produces no output.
4404
4405** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4406manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4407the mouse.
4408
4409** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4410mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4411function and variable names.
4412
4413** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4414reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4415file-coding-system-alist.
4416
4417** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4418t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4419converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4420the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4421according to the current fontset.
4422
4423** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4424
4425The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4426that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4427nonascii-insert-offset.
4428
4429For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4430enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4431nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4432characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4433
4434** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4435an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4436
4437** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4438letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4439
4440** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4441are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4442command keys.
4443
4444** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4445user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4446
4447Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4448user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4449all variables that have documentation.
4450
4451** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4452shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4453that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4454minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4455it should show; the default is 20.
4456
4457Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4458the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4459of your input.
4460
4461** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4462all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4463recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4464argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4465the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4466Newly added options are included as well.
4467
4468If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4469then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4470for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4471
4472This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4473Customize menu.
4474
4475** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4476the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4477
4478** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4479buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4480invoked.
4481
4482** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4483that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4484The default is 1.
4485
4486** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4487syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4488new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4489(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4490sensibly.
4491
4492** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4493
4494** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4495value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4496two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4497
4498** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4499reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4500for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4501every night.
4502
4503** Desktop changes
4504
4505*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4506the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4507
4508*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4509and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4510
4511** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4512read and post multi-lingual articles.
4513
4514** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4515doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4516be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4517outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4518the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4519made invisible again.
4520
4521** Mail reading and sending changes
4522
4523*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4524the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4525changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4526toggle.
4527
4528*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4529now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4530summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4531the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4532rmail-default-body-file.
4533
4534*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4535longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4536handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4537
4538*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4539it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4540is evaluated to insert the signature.
4541
4542*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4543outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4544handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4545putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4546transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4547especially interested in trying feedmail.
4548
4549feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4550feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4551provided by feedmail are:
4552
4553**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4554stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4555there is also a queue for draft messages
4556
4557**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4558be prompted for confirmation
4559
4560**** does smart filling of address headers
4561
4562**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4563the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4564can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4565
4566**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4567the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4568/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4569function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4570
4571** Dired changes
4572
4573*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4574files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4575
4576*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4577run Dired on the directory name at point.
4578
4579*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4580files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4581for a specified regexp.
4582
4583** VC Changes
4584
4585*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4586conveniently.
4587
4588*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4589faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4590Dired.
4591
4592VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4593directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4594listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4595currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4596
4597You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4598then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4599vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4600control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4601on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4602
4603All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4604is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4605`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4606the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4607`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4608
4609The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4610toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4611VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4612`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4613
4614Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4615ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4616command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4617
4618*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4619file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4620session to resolve them.
4621
4622Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4623resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4624contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4625uses as well).
4626
4627*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4628command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4629you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4630either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4631branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4632If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4633using ediff.
4634
4635** Changes in Font Lock
4636
4637*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4638are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4639use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4640unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4641compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4642
4643** Frame name display changes
4644
4645*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4646frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4647raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4648when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4649
4650*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4651frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4652menu.
4653
4654** Comint (subshell) changes
4655
4656*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4657subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4658with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4659
4660*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4661
4662C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4663that is, the line after the last line you got.
4664You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4665
4666C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4667send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4668the following line.
4669
4670C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4671which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4672previously sent input.
4673
4674C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4675it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4676as the search string.
4677
4678*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4679automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4680
4681** C mode changes
4682
4683*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4684and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4685assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4686definition.
4687
4688*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4689(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4690Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4691style is still the default however.
4692
4693*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4694
4695*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4696are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4697them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4698
4699*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4700and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4701
4702*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4703namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4704
4705*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4706makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4707
4708*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4709c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4710
4711*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4712should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4713package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4714variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4715
4716** Changes to hippie-expand.
4717
4718*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4719non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4720which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4721
4722*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4723non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4724expanding dynamically.
4725
4726*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4727non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4728
4729*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4730non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4731this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4732expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4733
4734*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4735
4736** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4737
4738*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4739bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4740automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4741bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4742against the first word in the title.
4743
4744*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4745capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4746bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4747lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4748lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4749bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4750
4751*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4752generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4753replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4754bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4755
4756** Changes in vcursor.el.
4757
4758*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4759and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4760variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4761entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4762`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4763in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4764
4765*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4766Editing group once the package is loaded.
4767
4768*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4769generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4770vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4771
4772*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4773vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4774
4775** Ispell changes.
4776
4777*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4778buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4779are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4780
4781*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4782A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4783and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4784defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4785include:
4786
4787 o URLs are automatically skipped
4788 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4789
4790*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4791
4792** Changes to RefTeX mode
4793
4794RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4795large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4796re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4797section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4798
4799*** New recursive parser.
4800
4801The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4802entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4803recursive parser scans the individual files.
4804
4805*** Parsing only part of a document.
4806
4807Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4808partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4809the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4810
4811 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4812
4813*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4814
4815This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4816
4817 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4818
4819*** Using multiple selection buffers
4820
4821If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4822for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4823
4824 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4825
4826*** References to external documents.
4827
4828The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4829documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4830documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4831macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4832RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4833the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4834The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4835
4836*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4837
4838The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4839and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4840
4841Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4842the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4843
4844*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4845
4846The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4847buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4848
4849*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4850
4851The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4852contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4853`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4854have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4855enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4856at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4857more.
4858
4859*** Support for the varioref package
4860
4861The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4862
4863*** New hooks
4864
4865Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4866and citations are created. These hooks are
4867`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4868`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4869
4870*** Citations outside LaTeX
4871
4872The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4873a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4874
4875*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4876
4877The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4878fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4879fontified, use
4880
4881 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4882
4883** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4884With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4885the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4886directories that contain the same file name.
4887
4888Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4889Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4890file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4891Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4892have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4893names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4894directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4895directory.
4896
4897** New modes and packages
4898
4899*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4900It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4901it, but some do not.
4902
4903*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4904code.
4905
4906*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4907current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4908around in a buffer.
4909
4910Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4911
4912*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4913uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4914be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4915established system of notation similar to Chess.
4916
4917*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4918documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4919guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4920
4921*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4922available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4923system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4924simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4925functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4926the like.
4927
4928*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4929identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4930
4931*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4932within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4933used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4934the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4935
4936*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4937
4938 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4939 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4940 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4941 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4942 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4943 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4944 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4945 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4946 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4947 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4948 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4949
4950 Platform-specific modes:
4951
4952 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4953 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4954 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4955 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4956 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4957 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4958 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4959 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4960 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4961\f
4962* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4963
4964** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4965use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4966That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4967Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4968
4969Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4970you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4971consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4972
4973** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4974and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4975specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4976searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4977
4978** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4979multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4980character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4981environment.
4982
4983** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4984take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4985string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4986current input method for reading this one event.
4987
4988** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4989now control whether to output certain characters as
4990backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4991non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4992characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4993in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4994\f
4995* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4996
4997** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4998of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4999
5000** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5001in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5002always increases point by 1.
5003
5004The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5005considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5006
5007See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5008
5009** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5010Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5011default value changed. For example,
5012
5013 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5014 :type 'integer
5015 :group 'foo
5016 :version "20.3")
5017
5018 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5019 :version "20.3")
5020
5021If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5022default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5023is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5024`:version' in the top level group.
5025
5026This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5027
5028** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5029starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5030
5031However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5032symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5033support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5034to themselves.
5035
5036If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5037this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5038values whatever.
5039
5040** There is a new debugger command, R.
5041It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5042in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5043
5044** Frame-local variables.
5045
5046You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5047the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5048local bindings for that variable.
5049
5050These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5051frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5052modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5053parameter name.
5054
5055Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5056Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5057active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5058that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5059
5060It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5061clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5062very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5063through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5064
5065** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5066"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5067evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5068makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5069See the documentation in sregex.el.
5070
5071** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5072is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5073parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5074The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5075
5076** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5077If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5078
5079** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5080known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5081define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5082
5083** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5084when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5085it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5086history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5087
5088The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5089return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5090empty input.
5091
5092** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5093for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5094`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5095Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5096`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5097
5098** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5099echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5100a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5101default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5102
5103** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5104specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5105function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5106place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5107non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5108
5109** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5110If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5111up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5112end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5113
5114** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5115which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5116If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5117
5118** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5119holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5120was directed to display this buffer.
5121
5122** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5123with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5124describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5125other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5126set-window-configuration.
5127
5128** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5129window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5130positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5131windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5132
5133** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5134override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5135look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5136
5137If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5138non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5139map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5140
5141minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5142and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5143
5144** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5145except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5146
5147** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5148USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5149floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5150
5151** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5152to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5153in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5154it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5155
5156** Menu changes
5157
5158*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5159keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5160better supported.
5161
5162The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5163a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5164you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5165can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5166then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5167
5168*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5169
5170In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5171 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5172defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5173starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5174
5175The format is:
5176 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5177 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5178where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5179string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5180The supported properties include
5181
5182:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5183 item is enabled.
5184:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5185 item should appear in the menu.
5186:filter FILTER-FN
5187 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5188 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5189 It should return a binding to use instead.
5190:keys DESCRIPTION
5191 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5192 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5193 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5194:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5195 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5196 keyboard binding.
5197:key-sequence nil
5198 This means that the command normally has no
5199 keyboard equivalent.
5200:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5201:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5202 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5203 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5204 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5205
5206Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5207Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5208
5209(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5210
5211** New event types
5212
5213*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5214mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5215corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5216which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5217
5218 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5219
5220where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5221same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5222indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5223negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5224the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5225forward, away from the user.
5226
5227As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5228
5229*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5230files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5231and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5232filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5233loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5234
5235 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5236
5237where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5238same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5239that were dragged and dropped.
5240
5241As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5242
5243** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5244
5245*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5246any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5247to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5248
5249*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5250can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5251that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5252
5253*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5254in Emacs 19 and before.
5255
5256The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5257The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5258
5259*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5260buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5261unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5262representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5263
5264This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5265as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5266viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5267one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5268will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5269
5270This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5271representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5272(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5273consistent with the new representation.
5274
5275*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5276representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5277about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5278however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5279
5280The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5281nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5282using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5283
5284*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5285representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5286representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5287
5288The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5289loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5290is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5291
5292*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5293which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5294
5295*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5296which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5297
5298*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5299portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5300so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5301You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5302
5303*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5304it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5305
5306*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5307convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5308buffer or string being searched.
5309
5310One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5311[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5312searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5313searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5314obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5315you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5316expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5317
5318*** Structure of coding system changed.
5319
5320All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5321by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5322which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5323as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5324vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5325your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5326define-coding-system-alias.
5327
5328The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5329the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5330access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5331pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5332character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5333safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5334'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5335`iso-8859-1'.
5336
5337Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5338The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5339coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5340(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5341
5342Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5343also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5344are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5345the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5346
5347*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5348proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5349This function requires a user interaction.
5350
5351*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5352find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5353select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5354systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5355a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5356select-safe-coding-system.
5357
5358*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5359decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5360last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5361was done.
5362
5363*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5364used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5365coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5366
5367*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5368return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5369characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5370`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5371
5372*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5373coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5374coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5375converted.
5376
5377*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5378coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5379
5380*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5381character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5382character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5383each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5384either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5385range of characters.
5386
5387*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5388Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5389
5390*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5391in the current buffer at position POS.
5392
5393*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5394input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5395function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5396character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5397event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5398binding input-method-function to nil.
5399
5400The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5401method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5402input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5403the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5404not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5405
5406The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5407subsequent events of a key sequence.
5408
5409*** You can customize any language environment by using
5410set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5411
5412The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5413customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5414instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5415environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5416exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5417\f
5418* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5419
5420** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5421options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5422at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5423tree structure.
5424
5425M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5426user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5427
5428With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5429session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5430in your .emacs file.)
5431
5432** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5433You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5434
5435** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5436This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5437
5438** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5439immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5440kills the region.
5441
5442The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5443delete the character before point, as usual.
5444
5445** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5446on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5447by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5448
5449** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5450insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5451the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5452onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5453history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5454past.)
5455
5456** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5457This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5458in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5459TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5460makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5461
5462As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5463and is an alias for it.
5464
5465If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5466use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5467
5468** Scrolling changes
5469
5470*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5471position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5472
5473In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5474on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5475where it started.
5476
5477*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5478move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5479screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5480does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5481
5482*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5483top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5484comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5485recenters the window.
5486
5487** International character set support (MULE)
5488
5489Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5490including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5491Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5492Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5493features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5494MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5495
5496Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5497coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5498character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5499variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5500into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5501
5502Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5503generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5504supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5505language, to make it possible to type them.
5506
5507The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5508character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5509
5510The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5511to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5512
5513You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5514
5515 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5516
5517Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5518characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5519argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5520already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5521characters for their work until they want to change.
5522
5523*** Input methods
5524
5525An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5526specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5527has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5528the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5529support several input methods.
5530
5531The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5532another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5533work.
5534
5535A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5536characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5537composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5538consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5539sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5540letter.
5541
5542The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5543by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5544First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5545marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5546mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5547
5548None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5549they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5550phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5551converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5552
5553Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5554word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5555typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5556the first guess is wrong.
5557
5558*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5559turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5560
5561If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5562byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5563they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5564the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5565
5566However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5567use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5568includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5569translate automatically to and from either one.
5570
5571*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5572
5573Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5574file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5575sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5576what you want.
5577
5578If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5579example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5580system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5581multibyte characters in that buffer.
5582
5583If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5584character conversion as well.
5585
5586*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5587
5588A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5589Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5590requires using many fonts.
5591
5592Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5593collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5594
5595A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5596the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5597have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5598you would use a font.
5599
5600If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5601specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5602display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5603
5604The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5605(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5606characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5607or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5608and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5609
5610*** Defining fontsets.
5611
5612Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5613chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5614with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5615
5616Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5617of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5618`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5619standard fontset are created automatically.
5620
5621If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5622argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5623FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5624with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5625name is `fontset-startup'.
5626
5627Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5628The resource value should have this form:
5629 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5630FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5631 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5632 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5633 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5634The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5635of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5636CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5637FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5638
5639Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5640last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5641You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5642
5643For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5644font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5645following resource,
5646 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5647the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5648 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5649Here is the substitution rule:
5650 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5651 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5652 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5653 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5654 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5655
5656The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5657fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5658that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5659
5660With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5661like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5662name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5663fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5664fontsets.
5665
5666*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5667defaults for a particular choice of language.
5668
5669Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5670method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5671visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5672already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5673language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5674system for new files that you create.
5675
5676It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5677set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5678whole Emacs session.
5679
5680For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5681chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5682with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5683
5684*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5685specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5686specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5687the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5688coding systems that Emacs supports.
5689
5690*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5691lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5692This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5693After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5694is used for *the immediately following command*.
5695
5696So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5697write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5698
5699If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5700then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5701
5702For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5703visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5704
5705*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5706construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5707to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5708specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5709of the file.
5710
5711*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5712the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5713code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5714translated into that character code.
5715
5716This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5717various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5718
5719By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5720
5721*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5722the coding system for keyboard input.
5723
5724Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5725with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5726some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5727
5728By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5729
5730Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5731input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5732translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5733to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5734designed to work with terminals.
5735
5736*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5737specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5738This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5739has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5740translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5741in the corresponding buffer.
5742
5743By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5744
5745*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5746to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5747It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5748
5749*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5750an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5751command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5752want to use.
5753
5754C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5755method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5756
5757*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5758layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5759remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5760which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5761
5762*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5763the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5764related information.
5765
5766*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5767HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5768scripts.
5769
5770*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5771information about the support for a particular language.
5772You specify the language as an argument.
5773
5774*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5775the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5776first dash.
5777
5778A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5779(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5780whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
57811 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5782
5783 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5784 B big5 (Chinese)
5785 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5786 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5787 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5788 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5789 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5790 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5791 K euc-korea (Korean)
5792 R koi8 (Russian)
5793 Q tibetan
5794 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5795 T lao
5796 T tis620 (Thai)
5797 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5798 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5799 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5800 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5801 z hz (Chinese)
5802
5803When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5804two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5805coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5806keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5807
5808*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5809conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5810
5811When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5812into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5813rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5814Rmail files themselves.
5815
5816*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5817conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5818
5819Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5820for sending mail:
5821
5822- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5823- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5824- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5825 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5826- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5827
5828*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5829to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5830Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5831translations.
5832
5833** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5834of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5835insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5836without any conversion.
5837
5838** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5839You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5840RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5841any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5842
5843** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5844functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5845
5846Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5847Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5848
5849Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5850mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5851
5852** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5853complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5854in the buffer before point.
5855
5856With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5857symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5858you are using.
5859
5860With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5861just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5862
5863** File locking works with NFS now.
5864
5865The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5866in the same directory as FILENAME.
5867
5868This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5869works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5870can become a bottleneck.
5871
5872The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5873does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5874create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5875file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5876rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5877so useful that the change is worth while.
5878
5879When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5880are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5881collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5882tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5883
5884** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5885it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5886show-paren-mode.
5887
5888** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5889selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5890delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5891
5892** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5893within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5894complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5895
5896** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5897it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5898set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5899
5900** Changes in View mode.
5901
5902*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5903Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5904
5905*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5906view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5907
5908*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5909previous state.
5910
5911*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5912scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5913
5914*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5915non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5916not just the selected window.
5917
5918*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5919read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5920turns View mode on or off.
5921
5922*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5923how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5924delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5925
5926** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5927now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5928
5929** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5930has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5931presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5932which version to compare with.
5933
5934** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5935blocks if a match is inside the block.
5936
5937The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5938is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5939isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5940shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5941
5942By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5943of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5944blocks, all of them or none.
5945
5946** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5947current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5948confirmation first.
5949
5950** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5951now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5952However, the mode will not be changed if
5953(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5954(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5955 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5956(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5957
5958This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5959
5960However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5961these commands do not change the major mode.
5962
5963** M-x occur changes.
5964
5965*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5966it performs a case-sensitive search.
5967
5968*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5969if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5970using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5971
5972** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5973in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5974window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5975that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5976buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5977
5978** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5979after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5980appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5981come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5982
5983** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5984selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5985buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5986
5987** Outline mode changes.
5988
5989*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5990
5991*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5992
5993** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5994you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5995Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5996was already active.
5997
5998The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5999unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6000get confused by it.
6001
6002If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6003set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6004
6005** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6006
6007*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6008conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6009character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6010including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6011
6012The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6013mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6014copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6015
6016*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6017are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6018values.
6019
6020`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6021case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6022`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6023case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6024
6025** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6026certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6027can be. The default value is 30.
6028
6029** Changes in Mail mode.
6030
6031*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6032Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6033composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6034`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6035`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6036behavior.
6037
6038C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6039compose-mail-other-frame.
6040
6041*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6042the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6043replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6044buffer that shows the original message.
6045
6046*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6047with separator lines around the contents.
6048
6049*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6050in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6051definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6052need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6053
6054*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6055
6056**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6057for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6058controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6059Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6060
6061**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6062to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6063/etc/passwd.
6064
6065**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6066to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6067/etc/passwd.
6068
6069** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6070special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6071directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6072reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6073
6074Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6075when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6076be taken to be magic.
6077
6078** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6079files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6080available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6081
6082M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6083(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6084
6085** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6086suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6087
6088In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6089
6090new key dired.el binding old key
6091------- ---------------- -------
6092 * c dired-change-marks c
6093 * m dired-mark m
6094 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6095 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6096 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6097 * u dired-unmark u
6098 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6099 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6100 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6101 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6102 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6103 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6104
6105** Rmail changes.
6106
6107*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6108saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6109chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6110each time you run it.
6111
6112*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6113whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6114
6115*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6116messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6117means to move in the opposite direction.
6118
6119*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6120you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6121
6122*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6123just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6124It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6125can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6126for output.
6127
6128** Gnus changes.
6129
6130*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6131
6132*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6133Gnus.
6134
6135*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6136`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6137
6138*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6139article mode line.
6140
6141*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6142
6143*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6144
6145(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6146
6147*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6148are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6149`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6150
6151*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6152
6153*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6154
6155*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6156See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6157
6158*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6159Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6160used to pick articles.
6161
6162*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6163another have been added.
6164
6165 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6166
6167*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6168generating lines in buffers.
6169
6170*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6171`M-C-_'.
6172
6173*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6174
6175*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6176
6177 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6178
6179*** Scores can be decayed.
6180
6181 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6182
6183*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6184Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6185
6186*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6187the native server.
6188
6189 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6190
6191*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6192(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6193
6194*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6195
6196*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6197even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6198
6199*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6200(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6201
6202 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6203 a group.
6204
6205*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6206sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6207
6208 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6209
6210*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6211
6212 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6213
6214*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6215
6216 Use the `Y c' command.
6217
6218*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6219
6220*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6221
6222 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6223
6224*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6225from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6226
6227 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6228
6229*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6230
6231*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6232the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6233
6234 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6235
6236Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6237and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6238from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6239hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6240this issue.)
6241
6242Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6243automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6244particular news group. This can be done by:
6245
6246 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6247
6248Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6249of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6250"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6251system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6252for reading and posting).
6253
6254CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6255 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6256Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6257newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6258there.
6259
6260Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6261default. Here are some of these default settings:
6262
6263 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6264 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6265 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6266 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6267 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6268
6269When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6270the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6271
6272** CC mode changes.
6273
6274*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6275code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6276values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6277this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6278Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6279loaded.
6280
6281If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6282Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6283style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6284share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6285c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6286must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6287
6288*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6289of the current buffer.
6290
6291*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6292it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6293of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6294
6295*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6296style that the Python developers like.
6297
6298*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6299This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6300just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6301
6302** VC Changes [new]
6303
6304** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6305name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6306directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6307
6308This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6309master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6310developers.
6311
6312You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6313RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6314
6315*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6316other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6317writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6318calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6319
6320*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6321version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6322
6323** Calendar changes.
6324
6325A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6326of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6327for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6328
6329** ps-print changes
6330
6331There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6332
6333*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6334
6335The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6336formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6337`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6338`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6339It defaults to `letter'.
6340If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6341
6342The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6343of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6344non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6345
6346The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6347It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6348It defaults to 1.
6349
6350*** Horizontal layout
6351
6352The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6353`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6354All are measured in points.
6355
6356*** Vertical layout
6357
6358The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6359`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6360All are measured in points.
6361
6362*** Headers
6363
6364If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6365`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6366margin above the text.
6367
6368If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6369framing box is printed around the header.
6370
6371The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6372`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6373
6374The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6375`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6376`ps-header-font-size'.
6377
6378*** Font managing
6379
6380The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6381used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6382`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6383elements to this alist.
6384
6385The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6386for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6387
6388** hideshow changes.
6389
6390*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6391C++, ; for lisp).
6392
6393*** Support for java-mode added.
6394
6395*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6396in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6397
6398*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6399the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6400way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6401
6402*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6403robust and a lot faster.
6404
6405*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6406
6407*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6408to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6409documentation for more details.
6410
6411** Changes in Enriched mode.
6412
6413*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6414filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6415of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6416use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6417the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6418
6419*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6420distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6421as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6422as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6423
6424** Font Lock mode
6425
6426*** Custom support
6427
6428The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6429font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6430faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6431group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6432your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6433consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6434
6435You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6436
6437*** Maximum decoration
6438
6439Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6440default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6441of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6442supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6443to get the old behavior.
6444
6445*** New support
6446
6447Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6448
6449Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6450support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6451
6452*** Configurable support
6453
6454Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6455additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6456c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6457java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6458list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6459of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6460convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6461
6462Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6463way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6464it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6465
6466*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6467
6468You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6469highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6470for any mode.
6471
6472For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6473
6474 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6475
6476in your ~/.emacs.
6477
6478*** New faces
6479
6480Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6481font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6482distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6483to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6484
6485*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6486
6487The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6488cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6489same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6490
6491*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6492
6493The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6494according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6495the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6496non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6497refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6498the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6499Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6500
6501This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6502For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6503this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6504refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6505containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6506the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6507
6508As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6509
6510Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6511Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6512Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6513new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6514
6515If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6516settings.
6517
6518** Ada mode changes.
6519
6520*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6521If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6522procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6523you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6524stubs.
6525
6526*** There are two new commands:
6527 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6528 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6529
6530The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6531`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6532`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6533
6534*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6535is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6536Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6537
6538*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6539formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6540places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6541space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6542
6543** Scheme mode changes.
6544
6545*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6546mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6547for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6548with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6549have any effect.
6550
6551If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6552still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6553scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6554variables as buffer-local variables.
6555
6556*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6557Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6558
6559** Changes to the emacsclient program
6560
6561*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6562USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6563associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6564can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6565
6566*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6567it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6568buffer in Emacs.
6569
6570*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6571use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6572ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6573option takes precedence.
6574
6575** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6576constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6577(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6578
6579** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6580which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6581the current defun.
6582
6583** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6584following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6585
6586** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6587and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6588necessary).
6589
6590** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6591if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6592these register values no longer become completely useless.
6593If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6594asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6595it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6596
6597** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6598example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6599be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6600you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6601
6602You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6603variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6604file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6605revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6606only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6607
6608** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6609since it applies only to the current frame.
6610
6611** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6612file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6613and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6614
6615This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6616multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6617variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6618tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6619instead of just the file you are editing.
6620
6621** RefTeX mode
6622
6623RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6624and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6625different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6626multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6627turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6628
6629C-c ( reftex-label
6630 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6631 knows which kind of label is needed.
6632
6633C-c ) reftex-reference
6634 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6635 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6636
6637C-c [ reftex-citation
6638 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6639 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6640
6641C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6642 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6643
6644C-c = reftex-toc
6645 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6646 can quickly jump to every section.
6647
6648Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6649commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6650Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6651reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6652C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6653
6654** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6655
6656*** Info documentation is now available.
6657
6658*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6659both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6660
6661*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6662bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6663
6664*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6665(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6666
6667*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6668entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6669appropriate functions.
6670
6671*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6672entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6673
6674*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6675been cleaned.
6676
6677*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6678bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6679
6680*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6681shall be delimited.
6682
6683*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6684bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6685bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6686
6687*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6688field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6689prefixed with `ALT'.
6690
6691*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6692bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6693formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6694documentation).
6695
6696*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6697documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6698for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6699
6700*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6701comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6702
6703*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6704alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6705signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6706
6707*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6708
6709*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6710
6711*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6712from alien sources.
6713
6714*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6715to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6716crossref entries.
6717
6718*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6719region.
6720
6721*** Added support for imenu.
6722
6723*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6724of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6725`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6726`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6727
6728*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6729from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6730
6731** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6732
6733** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6734
6735** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6736functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6737Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6738as an argument.
6739
6740When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6741and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6742
6743** browse-url changes
6744
6745*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6746Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6747(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6748non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6749customization variables.
6750
6751*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6752
6753*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6754lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6755(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6756
6757** Changes in Ediff
6758
6759*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6760pops up the Info file for this command.
6761
6762*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6763the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6764merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6765directories).
6766
6767*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6768and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6769files in the same directory.
6770
6771*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6772The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6773related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6774
6775** Changes in Viper
6776
6777*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6778*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6779 instead of vip-.
6780*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6781*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6782Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6783*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6784*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6785*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6786color when Viper is in insert state.
6787*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6788Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6789viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6790
6791** Etags changes.
6792
6793*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6794default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6795Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6796variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6797not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6798
6799*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6800
6801*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6802constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6803
6804*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6805recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6806In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6807
6808*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6809C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6810recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6811methods and protocols.
6812
6813*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6814.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6815column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6816paragraph name.
6817
6818*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6819an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6820at least M times and as many as N times.
6821
6822** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6823in files has changed slightly.
6824
6825With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6826time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6827This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6828with old time-stamp-format values.
6829
6830In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6831(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6832This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6833reasons.
6834
6835In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6836natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6837fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6838(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6839time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6840specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6841
6842Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6843case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6844truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6845
6846The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6847being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6848future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6849recommended now will continue to work then.
6850
6851See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6852details.
6853
6854** There are some additional major modes:
6855
6856dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6857m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6858meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6859
6860** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6861copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6862into Emacs.
6863
6864** New Lisp packages include:
6865
6866*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6867
6868*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6869be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6870
6871*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6872
6873*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6874in shell buffers.
6875
6876*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6877See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6878and `elint-defun'.
6879
6880*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6881meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6882ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6883strings or comments.
6884
6885These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6886abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6887you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6888insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6889at these points.
6890
6891*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6892can visit them by short forms of their names.
6893
6894*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6895Emacs Lisp function at point.
6896
6897*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6898
6899*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6900switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6901
6902*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6903
6904*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6905
6906*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6907
6908*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6909from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6910
6911*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6912You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6913inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6914original place after inserting the copy.
6915
6916*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6917on the buffer.
6918
6919You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6920velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6921(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6922
6923Enable mouse-drag with:
6924 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6925-or-
6926 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6927
6928*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6929mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6930
6931*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6932It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6933
6934*** ogonek
6935
6936The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6937Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6938platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6939TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6940ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6941prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6942instance) and vice versa.
6943
6944To use this package load it using
6945 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6946Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6947 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6948 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6949The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6950ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6951
6952*** Interface to ph.
6953
6954Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6955
6956The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6957services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6958these servers.
6959
6960*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6961
6962*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6963You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6964while the real cursor does not move.
6965
6966*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6967for visiting your favorite web sites.
6968
6969*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6970so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6971
6972** movemail change
6973
6974Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6975mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6976supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6977user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6978
6979This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6980\f
6981* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6982
6983** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6984
6985Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6986end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6987Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6988file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6989file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6990
6991To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6992C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6993coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6994specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6995LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6996save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6997\f
6998* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6999
7000** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7001Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7002vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7003Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7004
7005** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7006to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7007
7008In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7009don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7010"win".
7011
7012** Basic Lisp changes
7013
7014*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7015evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7016
7017*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7018be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7019or by the user.
7020
7021The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7022
7023*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7024
7025(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7026(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7027
7028*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7029usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7030its argument.
7031
7032*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7033
7034*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7035
7036*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7037
7038*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7039error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7040include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7041`format' function.
7042
7043*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7044or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7045whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7046
7047*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7048either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7049adding one of these suffixes.
7050
7051*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7052which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7053If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7054
7055We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7056because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7057
7058*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7059
7060*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7061You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7062
7063*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7064conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7065
7066 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7067
7068BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7069BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7070
7071*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7072choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7073restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7074works using `save-current-buffer'.
7075
7076*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7077write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7078of the last form.
7079
7080*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7081which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7082last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7083as the last form.
7084
7085*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7086characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7087matches.
7088
7089For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7090
7091*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7092with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7093Then it returns that string.
7094
7095For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7096
7097(with-output-to-string
7098 (princ "The buffer is ")
7099 (princ (buffer-name)))
7100
7101returns "The buffer is foo".
7102
7103** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7104is non-nil.
7105
7106These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7107buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7108characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7109
7110*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7111a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7112
7113Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7114character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7115Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7116position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7117characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7118 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7119
7120ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7121Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7122non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7123characters".
7124
7125The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7126through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7127"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7128range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7129leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7130
7131*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7132(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7133multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7134character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7135
7136This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7137always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7138
7139However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7140
7141*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7142because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7143have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7144the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7145guaranteed.
7146
7147*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7148between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7149character).
7150
7151When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7152
7153 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7154 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7155 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7156 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7157 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7158
7159*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7160
7161*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7162`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7163more than the number of characters.
7164
7165You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7166it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7167\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7168is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7169follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7170newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7171
7172*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7173and returns a string containing those characters.
7174
7175*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7176(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7177counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7178character, sref signals an error.
7179
7180*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7181in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7182string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7183
7184*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7185in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7186region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7187
7188*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7189the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7190to a vector of the characters in it.
7191
7192*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7193of a string. You call it as follows:
7194
7195 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7196
7197This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7198STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7199This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7200Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7201it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7202
7203*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7204if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7205
7206*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7207if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7208
7209*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7210to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7211not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7212which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7213
7214(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7215
7216This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7217
7218The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7219If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7220are not included in the resulting value.
7221
7222The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7223at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7224WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7225is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7226
7227If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7228place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7229character extends across that column), then the padding character
7230PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7231string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7232column START-COLUMN.
7233
7234*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7235the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7236necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7237difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7238changed text, before the change.
7239
7240*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7241sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7242one character set for each script, not for each language.
7243
7244**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7245
7246**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7247
7248**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7249set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7250
7251**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7252name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7253which identify the character within that character set.
7254
7255**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7256byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7257opposite of split-char.
7258
7259**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7260of all the characters between BEG and END.
7261
7262**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7263of all the characters in a string.
7264
7265*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7266and specifying coding systems.
7267
7268**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7269system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7270of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7271(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7272and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7273as what to do about code conversion.)
7274
7275**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7276name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7277
7278**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7279for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7280except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7281
7282Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7283which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7284to match against a file name.
7285
7286VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7287a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7288decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7289to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7290systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7291specifies the coding system for encoding.
7292
7293If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7294or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7295
7296**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7297the coding system to use for network sockets.
7298
7299Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7300which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7301either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7302service names.
7303
7304VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7305a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7306decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7307to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7308systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7309specifies the coding system for encoding.
7310
7311If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7312or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7313
7314**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7315for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7316except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7317start the subprocess.
7318
7319**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7320systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7321when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7322(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7323to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7324
7325**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7326coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7327subprocess.
7328
7329It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7330but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7331start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7332connection permanently or until overridden.
7333
7334The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7335file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7336network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7337coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7338It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7339system for one operation at a time.
7340
7341**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7342files, subprocesses or network connections.
7343
7344**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7345coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7346The value is a cons cell,
7347 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7348where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7349the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7350input to the subprocess.
7351
7352**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7353change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7354
7355** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7356customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7357you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7358
7359You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7360variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7361information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7362legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7363customization.
7364
7365Thus, instead of writing
7366
7367 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7368 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7369
7370you would now write this:
7371
7372 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7373 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7374 :type 'boolean
7375 :group foo)
7376
7377The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7378two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7379describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7380for a description of them.
7381
7382The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7383should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7384
7385 (defgroup ispell nil
7386 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7387 :group 'processes)
7388
7389The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7390group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7391but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7392to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7393second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7394
7395Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7396package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7397have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7398package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7399first-level subgroups.
7400
7401** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7402
7403This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7404separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7405
7406** easy-mmode
7407
7408The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7409developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7410only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7411predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7412`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7413`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7414
7415** Text property changes
7416
7417*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7418text property.
7419
7420*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7421previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7422place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7423functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7424starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7425
7426If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7427LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7428of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7429position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7430
7431*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7432value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7433is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7434
7435** Changes in invisibility features
7436
7437*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7438hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7439is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7440should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7441would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7442make the overlay visible.
7443
7444During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7445invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7446needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7447which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7448the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7449t when it should hide it.
7450
7451*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7452
7453Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7454invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7455and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7456Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7457manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7458Here is an example of how to do this:
7459
7460 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7461 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7462 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7463 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7464
7465 ...
7466 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7467
7468 ...
7469 ;; When done with the overlays:
7470 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7471 ;; Or respectively:
7472 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7473
7474** Changes in syntax parsing.
7475
7476*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7477`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7478obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7479`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7480
7481If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7482is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7483used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7484
7485When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7486character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7487
7488 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7489 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7490
7491 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7492 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7493 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7494
7495 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7496 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7497 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7498 determine the syntax type of the character.
7499
7500 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7501 of the current buffer.
7502
7503*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7504value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7505for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7506
7507*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7508and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7509only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7510character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7511another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7512
7513These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7514text property.
7515
7516*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7517arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7518of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7519
7520*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7521(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7522element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7523nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7524string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7525
7526*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7527syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7528`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7529
7530** Changes in face features
7531
7532*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7533if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7534
7535*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7536of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7537
7538*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7539set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7540
7541*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7542set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7543
7544*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7545by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7546and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7547the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7548overlay property).
7549
7550This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7551arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7552
7553** Changes in file-handling functions
7554
7555*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7556directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7557they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7558is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7559
7560This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7561begins with ~.
7562
7563*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7564it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7565
7566*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7567the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7568
7569*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7570as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7571
7572*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7573character code conversion as well as other things.
7574
7575Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7576(formerly it did not).
7577
7578*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7579environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7580
7581*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7582instead of constant strings.
7583
7584*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7585to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7586any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7587
7588substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7589in the same way as before.
7590
7591*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7592The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7593which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7594
7595*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7596error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7597else, and returns nil.
7598
7599*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7600directory cannot be listed.
7601
7602** Changes in minibuffer input
7603
7604*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7605read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7606additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7607argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7608ways:
7609
7610 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7611 It is available through the history command M-n.
7612
7613*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7614read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7615argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7616minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7617enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7618
7619In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7620argument in this way.
7621
7622*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7623from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7624minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7625
7626** Echo area features
7627
7628*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7629echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7630minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7631after the echo area is cleared.
7632
7633*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7634in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7635
7636** Keyboard input features
7637
7638*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7639set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7640
7641*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7642received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7643by keyboard macros.
7644
7645** Frame-related changes
7646
7647*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7648creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7649hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7650
7651*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7652the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7653has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7654
7655*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7656selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7657value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7658in the selected frame.
7659
7660*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7661is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7662which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7663
7664** X Windows features
7665
7666*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7667x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7668x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7669
7670*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7671The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7672
7673*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7674MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7675A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7676
7677If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7678it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7679
7680** Subprocess features
7681
7682*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7683functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7684automatically.
7685
7686*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7687and returns the output from the command as a string.
7688
7689*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7690and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7691
7692** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7693does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7694
7695** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7696at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7697goes after the other menu items.
7698
7699** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7700of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7701around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7702are in use.
7703
7704The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7705series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7706
7707Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7708after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7709form.
7710
7711** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7712is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7713but its hook is still run.
7714
7715** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7716for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7717
7718If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7719regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7720useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7721
7722This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7723are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7724filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7725warned.
7726
7727** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7728way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7729
7730** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7731integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7732functions like display-time.
7733
7734** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7735name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7736
7737** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7738can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7739is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7740
7741** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7742if there is an error in compilation.
7743
7744** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7745switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7746argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7747they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7748
7749** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7750Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7751the *scratch* buffer.
7752
7753** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7754The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7755where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7756e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7757
7758** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7759and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7760It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7761
7762** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7763using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7764variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7765and compose-mail-other-frame.
7766
7767** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7768can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7769full name of the specified user will be returned.
7770
7771** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7772of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7773where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7774in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7775option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7776files at all.
7777
7778** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7779and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7780width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7781the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7782
7783For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7784minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7785with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7786is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7787
7788** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7789
7790** imenu.el changes.
7791
7792You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7793item from menu created by imenu.
7794
7795An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7796#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7797select one of those items.
7798\f
7799* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7800\f
7801* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7802
7803** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7804mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7805
7806** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7807use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7808Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7809\f
7810* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7811
7812** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7813To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7814
7815** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7816conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7817matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7818expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7819word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7820all caps.
7821
7822** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7823at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7824
7825When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7826does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7827as in previous Emacs versions.
7828
7829** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7830non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7831time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7832frames.
7833
7834** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7835if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7836This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7837Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7838accident.
7839
7840** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7841keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7842It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7843line and then executing the macro.
7844
7845This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7846
7847** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7848(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7849characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7850characters.
7851
7852** Font Lock mode
7853
7854*** Font Lock support modes
7855
7856Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7857below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7858hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7859to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7860Font Lock mode is enabled.
7861
7862For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7863
7864 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7865
7866in your ~/.emacs.
7867
7868*** lazy-lock
7869
7870The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7871only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7872becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7873Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7874occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7875buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7876Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7877
7878To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7879
7880 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7881
7882To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7883
7884** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7885
7886*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7887paren and key.
7888
7889*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7890supported.
7891
7892** Gnus changes.
7893
7894Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7895commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7896significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7897previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7898
7899Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7900between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7901
7902*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7903variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7904obsolete.
7905
7906*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7907missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7908
7909 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7910
7911*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7912
7913 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7914
7915*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7916referred.
7917
7918*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7919
7920 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7921
7922*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7923
7924 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7925
7926*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7927buffers.
7928
7929 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7930
7931*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7932
7933 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7934
7935*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7936
7937 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7938
7939*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7940
7941 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7942
7943*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7944is possible.
7945
7946 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7947
7948*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7949groups of groups.
7950
7951*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7952
7953*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7954batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7955
7956*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7957
7958*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7959
7960*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7961
7962 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7963
7964*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7965expiration times.
7966
7967*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7968
7969*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7970process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7971
7972*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7973articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7974bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7975
7976*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7977articles with the `*' command.
7978
7979*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7980
7981*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7982
7983 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7984
7985*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7986
7987*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7988`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7989
7990*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7991buffer.
7992
7993*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7994
7995*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7996
7997*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7998
7999 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8000
8001*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8002
8003 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8004
8005*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8006
8007*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8008
8009*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8010
8011 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8012 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8013
8014*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8015refetching.
8016
8017 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8018
8019*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8020buffer to allow easier treatment.
8021
8022*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8023
8024*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8025
8026 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8027
8028*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8029articles.
8030
8031 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8032
8033*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8034
8035*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8036cited text to hide is now customizable.
8037
8038 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8039
8040*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8041
8042 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8043
8044*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8045
8046*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8047
8048The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8049in greater detail.
8050\f
8051* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8052
8053** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8054second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8055asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8056exists.
8057
8058** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8059as well as lists.
8060
8061** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8062of a given keymap.
8063
8064** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8065given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8066keymap or nil.
8067
8068** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8069an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8070name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8071menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8072equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8073alias.
8074\f
8075* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8076
8077** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8078
8079Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8080This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8081was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8082far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8083pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8084
8085For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8086you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8087`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8088
8089** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8090
8091The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8092do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8093It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8094much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8095chapter of the manual for details.
8096
8097However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8098customization variables take effect.
8099
8100** Marking with the mouse.
8101
8102When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8103highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8104using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8105
8106** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8107
8108*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8109
8110*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8111to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8112
8113*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8114in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8115you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8116application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8117applications, these problems are significant.
8118
8119If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8120likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8121However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8122will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8123other DOS application as a subprocess.
8124
8125Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8126You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8127
8128If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8129subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8130have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8131Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8132separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8133Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8134
8135** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8136
8137This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8138which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8139minibuffer contains.
8140
8141** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8142
8143The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8144It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8145It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8146affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8147
8148The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8149it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8150and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8151when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8152
8153** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8154enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8155
8156** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8157F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8158Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8159
8160If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8161menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8162something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8163the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8164
8165 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8166
8167** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8168to replace the characters it "deletes".
8169
8170** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8171
8172** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8173a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8174select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8175It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8176immediately after the selected one.
8177
8178This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8179made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8180
8181** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8182
8183Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8184directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8185If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8186Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8187recover-session.
8188
8189You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8190auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8191will not work.
8192
8193Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8194normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8195this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8196bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8197now that the bug is fixed.
8198
8199** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8200
8201There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8202when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8203Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8204which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8205
8206If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8207telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8208VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8209the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8210
8211** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8212Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8213is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8214
8215There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8216Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8217enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8218The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8219remain normal.
8220
8221** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8222header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8223
8224Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8225known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8226offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8227Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8228
8229Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8230of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8231a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8232name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8233documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8234`mail-directory-stream'.)
8235
8236** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8237skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8238characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8239with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8240
8241Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8242- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8243wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8244
8245The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8246less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8247headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8248Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8249Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8250fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8251to a limitation in font-lock).
8252
8253External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8254
8255** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8256buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8257buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8258this example:
8259
8260 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8261 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8262
8263** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8264
8265*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8266
8267*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8268
8269*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8270
8271*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8272entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8273will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8274isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8275(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8276The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8277
8278*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8279does the same job.
8280
8281*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8282"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8283
8284*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8285text.
8286
8287** Font Lock mode
8288
8289*** Global Font Lock mode
8290
8291Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8292new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8293font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8294turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8295on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8296
8297For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8298
8299 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8300
8301in your ~/.emacs.
8302
8303*** Local Refontification
8304
8305In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8306However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8307those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8308command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8309
8310In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8311(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8312current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8313above and below point.
8314
8315With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8316
8317** Follow mode
8318
8319Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8320buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8321side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8322they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8323split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8324follow-mode.
8325
8326M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8327
8328To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8329command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8330
8331** hide-show changes.
8332
8333The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8334to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8335normal hooks.
8336
8337** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8338The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8339
8340** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8341recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8342those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8343
8344** MSDOS Changes
8345
8346*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8347Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8348
8349*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8350and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8351
8352*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8353
8354*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8355pressing both mouse buttons.
8356
8357*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8358restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8359are:
8360
8361**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8362now works.
8363
8364**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8365
8366**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8367implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8368
8369**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8370
8371**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8372
8373**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8374
8375**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8376
8377**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8378\f
8379* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8380
8381** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8382tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8383remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8384this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8385behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8386
8387** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8388
8389The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8390not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8391need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8392be different.
8393
8394It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8395than `system-type'.
8396
8397See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8398
8399** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8400now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8401
8402** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8403that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8404
8405** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8406no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8407reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8408
8409The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8410to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8411like this:
8412
8413 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8414
8415SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8416It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8417becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8418
8419REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8420seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8421means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8422
8423*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8424up if too much time passes.
8425
8426 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8427
8428This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8429If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8430of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8431form in BODY.
8432
8433*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8434a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8435call looks like this:
8436
8437 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8438
8439SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8440runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8441timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8442ARGS.
8443
8444Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8445command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8446command.
8447
8448REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8449time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8450does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8451each time Emacs becomes idle.
8452
8453If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8454idle for SECS seconds.
8455
8456*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8457all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8458programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8459instead.
8460
8461*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8462there is no answer within a certain time.
8463
8464 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8465
8466asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8467within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8468Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8469
8470** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8471arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8472meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8473arguments in between are ignored.
8474
8475This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8476the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8477
8478** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8479/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8480/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8481site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8482version.
8483
8484It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8485version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8486for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8487has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8488and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8489problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8490
8491** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8492.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8493systems with limited file name syntax.
8494
8495Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8496convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8497for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8498completions.el:
8499
8500(defvar save-completions-file-name
8501 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8502 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8503
8504This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8505depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8506convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8507Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8508MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8509
8510** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8511rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8512minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8513
8514** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8515marker from its buffer position.
8516
8517** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8518Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8519The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8520
8521** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8522that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8523condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8524of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8525matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8526regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8527
8528This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8529errors that happen often during editing.
8530
8531** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8532into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8533puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8534
8535** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8536now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8537
8538** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8539a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8540name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8541to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8542and not get-buffer-window.
8543
8544** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8545calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8546being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8547
8548If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8549buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8550property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8551non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8552are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8553property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8554over and over for the same text.
8555
8556** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8557
8558*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8559in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8560
8561;; @(#) HEADER: text
8562;; $HEADER: text $
8563
8564in addition to the normal
8565
8566;; HEADER: text
8567
8568*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8569checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8570lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8571
8572
a933dad1 8573\f
3787e12e 8574* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8575
8576----------------------------------------------------------------------
8577Copyright information:
8578
424d8b44 8579Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8580
8581 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8582 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8583 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8584 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8585
8586 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8587 of this document, or of portions of it,
8588 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8589 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8590\f
8591Local variables:
8592mode: outline
8593paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8594end: